Home

7035/8255/8260 Terminals User Manual

1. Function Pin Signal Name Description 1 GND Digital ground Ground 2 GND Digital ground 3 MIC Microphone input Audio 4 LINE OUT Line level audio output Alarm 5 BEEP External beeper output Stig 6 SHIELD Digital ground Input If grounded at power up causes Diagnos 7 DIAG terminal to enter diagnostic mode Menu tic Mode allows flash ROM upgrade and other test modes 8 SCNR ENABLE Output enable to initiate external scan engine Output scan acknowledge Currently Non 7 Pen drives decode LED on external scanner Decoded Scanner 10 SCNR_TRIG Scanner trigger input 11 SCNR_DATA Scanner undecoded serial data input 12 SCNR_SOS Not used Serial 13 SERIAL2_RXD Serial data input RS 232D Port2 14 SERIAL2 TXD Serial data output RS 232D COM 2 15 P7_2V Switched 7 4V battery power Power 16 P7_2V Switched 7 4V battery power Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual B 1 Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255 60 Peripheral Port I O Connector 28 Pin PCR B 2 Function Pin Signal Name Description Scanner 17 5V_SCAN_PWR 5 V scanner power duplicate of pin 18 Power 18 5V_SCAN_PWR TX_KEY Signal forradio test nOr 19 EXPO Expansion 0 20 CV_OUT Control voltage output 21 EXPl Expansion 1 Radio 22 EXP2 Expansion 2 Test 23 EXP3 Expansion 3 24 EXP4 Expansion 4 25 RTS1 Request to
2. 111 7 2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu 111 7 3 Working With Menus o o 113 7 3 1 Softkey Function KeyS o o o 113 7 3 2 Displaying Sub Menus o o 000004 114 7 3 3 Numeric Parameters sess soste maa w d a a e a ee 114 1234 YIN Parameters suna doe aw e e RA 115 T 3 5 Alpha Parameters o 2 422 ae ennea bee e a eae a 115 7 3 6 String Entry Parameters o s s et a s aona sose aos w a avia au aa 115 7 3 6 1 Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys 116 7 3 6 2 Adding Additional ASCII Characters 116 7 3 6 3 Entering Information In A String Entry Field 116 7 3 7 Saving Changes To Parameters o o o 117 7 3 8 Resetting The Terminal 2 2 o o eee 117 7 3 8 1 Resetting The 7035 o o 117 7 3 8 2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 117 7 3 9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values 117 7 4 Terminal Parameters o o 118 7 4 1 Displaying The Parameters Menu o o ooo 118 TS SYSTEM is a amp ace e e a a 120 7 5 1 Volume And Contrast ss eose o ooo 120 Tow Key Clicks 5 oi ok ia aa HAS Oe 121 7 5 3 One Shot Mode 2 2 45 2248 04 BD eee mes eS 121 134 Typematic Rpts s s so ba each eke dae eee ede a 122 TI Caps Lock Ono iaa a 6 oa be AAA od 123 LIO Panning conos eRe Ke ee ee eed Ae Ree eee ws 123 ED Back i042 4 eee ch bake ob
3. 204 8 3 4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger 204 8 3 5 Charging The Battery socs e w goeroe p o 205 8 3 6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions 0 205 8 3 7 Charger Fault Conditions lt ces ssa as o 206 8 3 8 Removing The Terminal From The In Unit Charger 206 8 3 9 7942 Charger Specifica nS qas o o oo o 206 8 4 The 7967 Gang Charger o o e 207 8 4 1 Connecting The Power Source o o o a 207 8 4 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery 207 8 4 3 Fault Conditions o o e 207 8 4 3 1 Fault LED Turns On During A Charge 208 8 4 3 2 Fault LED Turns On At Insertion 208 8 4 4 7967 Charger Specifications 00 0 208 5 7978 Gane Charger os O00 oe aoe a Bae oe FR a a 209 8 5 1 Connecting The Power Source 0 0 0 209 8 5 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery 209 5 5 3 Fault Conditions segs 64 264 4 ba dba SE eR A ee 210 8 5 3 1 Red Fault LED TumsOd o o o 210 8 5 3 2 Red Fault LED Blinks 210 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 197 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories 8 5 3 3 Yellow Charge LED Blinks Low Temperature Standby 8 5 4 7978 Charge Specifications 2 2 0 ee eee 8 6 Important Charger Safety Instructions
4. ContNxtField This parameter only applies to string entry data When enabled set to Y this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field If ContNxtField is disabled set to N OFF data will flow into the next field Append Enter When enabled set to Y Append Enter causes an lt ENTER gt code to be appended to the bar code The lt ENTER gt code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field Append FO When enabled set to Y this parameter causes an lt FO gt code to be appended to the bar code The lt FO gt code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled set to Y AIAG labels are always accepted and processed even if mixed with keyboard input The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data If this parameter is disabled AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 169 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Fields Rjct if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric field and Rjct if Alpha is enabled set to Y bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected Beam Lockout When enabled set to Y this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in LOCK H mode 7 1 2 1 Fields
5. Fields Range Field Order Y Y N Enter To FO Y Y N Enter On Arr Y Y N Entry Mode field see text Open Fky Only N Y N Video see text All Fld Video Y Y N Ign Bcode_fld N Y N Enh Edit Mode N Y N Valid Numerics see text Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers When enabled set to Y the cursor moves according to field location If disabled set to N the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields Enter To FO The lt ENTER gt key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field However some applications require that the lt ENTER gt key start a transmission from the terminal When enabled set to Y this parameter causes the lt ENTER gt key to be interpreted as lt FO gt which starts a transmission Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled set to Y the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field 170 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Fields Entry Mode Entry Mode parameters allow you to select a data entry mode The modes are insert replace field and fcursor TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement on page 95 describes these modes in detail Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled set t
6. 77 3 8 1 Accessing Alpha KeyS oes ec eee na 0 o 77 3 8 2 Accessing AZERTY Function Keys 77 3 8 3 Accessing AZERTY Macro Keys 80 Chapter 4 Tekterm 4 1 Introduction s 6 3 4 60 od a ea SG Be Bh 83 4 2 Launching TekterM o o e e 83 4 3 Working With Application Session Windows 84 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual iti Contents 4 4 Radio Statistics Screens 2 o o ee ee ee 84 4 4 1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen 84 4 4 2 802 11 Radio Statistics Screen o o 85 4 4 3 TRX7370 NB amp 802 11 SS Radio Statistics Screen 86 4 4 4 802 IQv1 Radio Statistics Screen 87 4 4 5 802 IQv2 Radio Statistics Screen 89 4 5 Resetting Radio Statistics 2 ee ee 90 4 6 Exiting Tekterm sacara oia AS RR RAE eA 90 ap 5 TESS Operations Configuration 262 6 cee aeni ae ve ee eee eh e a ewe 93 Working With Multiple Sessions ooa a 93 5 3 The Field Types s ex ata ci oa ed de A a he 93 5 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys o a 94 59 Datt ENUY xw a ae ee Bae ee ee a e RUS a A 94 5 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 95 5 5 2 lt CLR gt Key Behaviour In TESS 96 5 5 3 lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS 97 9 6 Lock Messages 6 4044 04 od go et a de ada a a 98 5 7 ControlCommands s sie seca pedit a ame 0 000000 ee eee 99 a
7. Range Field Size 0 0 99 Prefix Char 0 0 255 Suffix Char 0 0 255 Strip Leading 0 0 127 Strip Trailing 0 0 127 136 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Code 39 Field Size The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added If the field size is non zero only bar codes of that length are passed through Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character Enter a value of 0 zero if no prefix is to be added Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character Enter a value of 0 zero if no suffix is to be added Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added AN Notes 1 The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt DEL gt is pressed the usual action for that key is performed With ANSI emulation the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data 2 For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parame
8. 216 8 8 9 Picker Cradle Maintenance 216 8 8 10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal 217 8 8 11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator 218 8 8 12 Specifications cierras orar AA 218 89 GPS Unit s reatata ed ed need eb eb eee eh eee om 220 8 10 Active Transient Filter Power Supply 220 8 11 Accessories Liste ss o 2 be Oe eRe RD ee ERE ews 222 Chapter 9 Specifications 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 Radio Specifications cos cows o ee ee ee ee ee 225 7035 Hand Held Terminal Specifications 228 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications 230 Penpheral Ports 2 eo a cei Gal eee ee a eee hw ws 233 9 4 1 Serial Port 1 COMTD o o o ooo ooo 233 9 4 2 Serial Port2 COMB2 0 o o o o ooo ooo 233 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual vii vill Contents 9 5 Memory Expansion Board c aea c esci es o ipaa eaa 234 9 6 IrDA Port 7035 Only coa e ss aa a ee eee 234 9 7 Wireless Communication Options 00 234 9 8 GPS Unit eee ee eh eee eee Re KOE RRR Ee eee ee es 234 99 Bar Code Scanning so sos s ead eee Se a eR eae 235 9 9 1 Internal Scanners 7035 Only 235 9 92 External Scanners se si 4a ee 4 ds a 235 9 9 3 Internal Scanner Port 7035 Only 235 9 10 Internal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only 236 9 101 Decode ZOnes s s rdu na eo Seba ioie a ee 239
9. Settings ANSI Auto Term Group only available with 802 1Q radios Terminal Host Conn Conn Type Host Port Faster oo t Auto Login FK Remap Screen Pages Columns Rows Auto Wrap Disp Cirls Font Size Cursor Type Softkeys F1 La Video Normal Bold Faint Char Set cont d EN Underline These parameters are only available when Telnetis chosen as the ANSI Conn Type continued on next page Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Applications Settings ANSI cont d View Manager GPS Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus Char Set Lower E Upper Transmit Xmit Count Xmit Wait Dev Attr Auto Answer 7 Bit Keyboard Newline Echo mode DEL key PrtScr key Serial Async In Exclusive Start End Anchor View X origin Y origin Use Increment X increment Y increment Display Shift Custom Chars 0 gt x20 0 Font Code 0 Font Override cis font 18x32 Font Code 1 is font es Font Code iS font foxes Font Code 3 1S font 18x32 Font Code 4 is font 18x20 GGA GLL RMC VTG Tx Period Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual F 5 Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus Ports Serial 1 Parameters Speed Data Bits Parity_ Stop Bits Flow Ctrl Tmo Delay Buffer Retries Retry Tmo Input Tmo Test These parameters vary depending on the device assigned at Serial 1 and Console 2 and on the radio installed in the termi
10. d and g These alpha characters are accessed from the numeric keys lt 1 gt lt 2 gt and lt 3 gt e With the lt ORANGE gt key activated press lt 1 gt to type the letter a e Press lt 2 gt to type d and press lt 3 gt to type the letter g e To end alpha selection press the lt ORANGE gt key a second time 3 5 2 Accessing Function Keys 36 key 7035 terminals are equipped with 30 function keys the first 10 of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 20 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt FI0 gt Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt are directly accessible by pressing the appropriate function key on the keyboard that is a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt are located along the top of the keyboard lt F5 gt to lt F10 gt are located at the bottom of the keyboard For example e To access function key lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on through to lt F10 gt Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt FI1 gt To lt F20 gt Accessing lt F11 gt to lt F20 gt requires pressing the lt ORANGE gt key and then the appropriate function key from lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 63 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing The Macro Keys For example to access function key lt F11 g
11. Channel This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal The channel selected must be an enabled channel Refer to Channel Enable on page D 15 on for details about enabling channels Power Up Chan If this parameter is enabled set to Y the terminal will start communicating on the channel specified in the Channel parameter when the terminal is powered up This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites If this parameter is disabled set to N the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off D 14 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters Channel Channel Enable Chan enable Rang CH 1 enable Y Y N e e e CH 20 enable Y Y N These parameters are used to enable Y or disable N up to 20 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the TRX7370 radio Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel Channel and also makes the channel available for channel searching If for example if channel 1 is the operating channel and all other channels are enabled the terminal may roam through all 20 channels Note that the Channel Enable menu only displays chan nels that have been configured with frequencies Switch Speed This parameter changes the
12. e Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 201 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Lithium lon Battery Pack Specifications Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries such as dry cell batteries or batteries of different capacities or brands Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odor generates heat becomes discoloured or deformed or in any way appears abnormal during use Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specified charge time The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks Always ensure that it is away from any exposed flames If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes rinse them with clean running water and immediately seek medical attention Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures e g a vehicle strong direct sunlight etc This may cause the battery to overheat or ignite and it may also reduce the performance and service life of the battery Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees Keep batteries out of reach of children 8 2 2 Lithium lon Battery Pack Specifications Battery Pack Technology Lithium Ion Li Ion Supported pack PN 20605 003 Charge temperature 10 C to 45 C 50 F to 113 F Discharge temperature 20 C to 60
13. e Type the current access ID and press lt ENTER gt If AirFortress has never been configured type default Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual E 3 Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client Turning Encryption On And Off A New window is displayed once the correct access ID is entered e Type anew 16 digit hexadecimal access ID and press lt ENTER gt Keep in mind that this access ID must match the one assigned to the AirFortress Gateway AF1100 e Inthe Confirm field type the new access ID again and press lt ENTER gt A message will confirm that you have a successfully changed the access ID e Press M to return to the startup menu E 3 3 Turning Encryption On And Off Keep in mind that turning encryption off allows unencrypted data to be sent to and received by your terminal leaving your network open to potential damage AN Important Encryption should only be turned off when connecting to a network that is not protected by an AirFortress Gateway AF1100 To toggle encryption on or off e Choose the Toggle Encryption option from the menu An encryption prompt is displayed e Press Y and then press the lt ENTER gt key E 3 4 Resetting Connections This option helps manage the connection between the terminals using AirFortress and the other network devices To reset connections e Choose Reset Connections from the startup menu E 4 Teklogix
14. the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of terminal numbers from which an auto address is chosen Terminal For every application session you create the terminal number assigned in the Terminal parameter must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the terminal Other applications running in the terminal such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different terminal number In addition each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number 1 7 2 1 Host Conn AN Important This parameter is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio Host Conn Range Conn Type 802 IQv2 802 10 9010t Settings see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running ANSI or TESS For TESS applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections 802 10v2 or 9010t TCP Direct In either case the terminal will be communicating through a controller or an SDK For details about ANSI options review Host Conn on page 148 160 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Screen Settings AN Note The
15. 2 1 Preparing Terminals For Operation o 15 2 1 1 Client Side Emulation Software o o o o ooo 15 2 2 Preparing The 7035 For Operation o o 15 2 2 1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna 15 2 2 2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing 15 2 2 3 Attaching The 7035 Hand Strap Or The Pistol Grip 17 2 2 3 1 Attaching The Hand Strap o o 17 2 2 3 2 Attaching The Pistol Grip 0 o 17 2 3 Installing 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals 18 2 3 1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal 18 2 3 2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 19 2 3 3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal o o 21 2 3 4 Connecting The 8255 8260 Antenna o o ooo 22 2 3 5 Installing The Cables o c cc c eaat ee ogean er ee a h ES 22 2 3 6 Installing The Extension Power Cable 23 2 4 Turning The Terminals On And Off o o ooo 24 2 4 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal o o o ooo 24 2 4 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals 25 2 5 Resetting Terminals so a s ed o oo 25 2 3 1 Resettme The 7035 s e 4 accasa a ro a a Se 25 2 5 2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 o o o o o o o ooo 25 2 6 Working With The Startup Display Menu 0 26 2 6 1 The Display Menu 2 o ooo 26 2 6 1 1 B
16. Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories The 7967 Gang Charger 8 4 The 7967 Gang Charger The 7967 Gang Charger can charge up to six Lithium Ion batteries at one time 8 4 1 Connecting The Power Source The 7967 Gang Charger is powered using a universal AC input It accepts voltages ranging from 100 230 volts AC 50 60 Hz The AC receptacle an IEC 320 type connector is located at the back of the charger e Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger e Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source All front panel LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self test mode The Power On LED then remains on indicating a power connection e Check to make sure that the fan is running 8 4 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery The 7967 Gang Charger has a Power On LED and each charge pocket has three LEDs Charge Fault and Ready Ensure that the green Power On LED at the front left side of the charger is on The battery charge pockets are moulded making it easy to snap the batteries into the pockets e With the four electrical contacts facing down and textured plastic battery surface facing the front of the charger insert the battery into a charger pocket It should click into place Charging will begin immediately Battery Charged And Ready When the Charge LED turns off and the green Ready LED turns on the fast charge cycle
17. Insert parameter is disabled set to N the keyboard operates in replace mode In replace mode the graphic symbol or control function replaces or depending upon the implementation is combined with the graphic symbol at the cursor Newline When this parameter is disabled set to N a LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column In addition the lt ENTER gt key transmits a CR When enabled set to Y an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line The lt ENTER gt key transmits both a CR and an LF DEC Cursor Keys This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Appl Mode Cursor Mode causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences Application Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions 7 7 1 6 Serial Serial Range Async In N Y N Exclusive Y Y N Start 0 0 255 End 0 0 255 Async In When this parameter is enabled set to Y the serial async port is ready to receive input at all times 158 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters TESS Settings Exclusive ANSI sessions can be configured to receive all serial input even if they are not the currently active session To send data to a single session the Exclusive parameter must be set to Y If more than one ses
18. Settings sub menu is only available when 9010t is selected as the Conn Type Settings Range Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format HH HHH HHH HHH Port Port specifies the 9010t TCP Direct port number By default the 9010t port is assigned the value 9999 1 1 2 2 Screen Screen Rang Columns 80 20 132 Rows 24 4 60 Scroll Mode Normal Normal Field Origin Pages Saved 16 1 16 App Parameter 1 Ala es Font Size 18x20 see text Cursor Type Underline Underline Block Softkeys see text Columns This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display AN Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 161 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Screen Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminal s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display AN Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Scroll Mode This paramet
19. generates aim dot Scanner enable output active low enables 5 SCAN_ENABLE or 6 SCAN DATA Scanner data input 7 SCAN_SOS Start of Scan input 8 GROUND Digital ground 9 GROUND Digital ground 10 SHIELD Chassis ground B 5 Flash Serial Download Cable Pin Signal Name Description GND System ground 2 KEY_CONFIG 0 System ground 6 SHIELD Shield ground 7 BOOT_MON_EXT If held low at Power ON terminal enters BOOT menu 13 SCNR_SERIAL_IN Serial data receive signal 14 SCNR_SERIAL_OUT Serial data transmit signal B 6 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 28 Pin PCR To 8 Pin DIN Connector PN 19726 B 6 28 Pin PCR To 8 Pin DIN Connector PN 19726 28 Pin PCR 8 Pin DIN Ground Ground Shield CASE Shield Enable Enable Ack 5V Ack Trigger Trigger Scanner Data Scanner Data Serial In Serial In Serial Out Serial Out Scanner Power 5V 5V Output Female Female TERMINAL SCANNER CABLE B 7 28 Pin PCR To 7 Pin DIN Connector PN 19727 28 Pin PCR 7 Pin DIN Ground Ground Shield CASE TAB Shield Enable Enable Ack 5V Ack Trigger Trigger Scanner Data Scanner Data Scanner Power to 5V 5V Output Scanner Power Power Output Femal 7 V for 7030 Femal ae 12V for 8055 8060 hae TERMINAL SCANNER CABLE Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User
20. 0 8 Antenna Lypess sens os a de d ea gata A ed ee we 8 8 The 7035 Picker Cradle s ecer ea moci aoe poe ee ee 8 8 1 Mounting Hardware ae ay a ea 8 8 2 Installation ocio ca rara A A a 8 8 3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting 8 8 4 Mounting The Cradle 2 2 o o o ee eee 8 8 5 Installing The Cables 2 2 ee 8 8 6 Connecting A Cable sss sie daea dosos m aca a d aaa e eee 8 8 7 Connecting The Power Source o o oea ecs cce wor ew oaia ai net 8 8 8 Attaching A Port Replicator oaoa a 8 8 9 Picker Cradle Maintenance o oo a 8 8 10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal 8 8 11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator 2 2 a 8 8 12 Specifications ss e 4 dhe a ea oH ee a oe as 8 12 1 Physicals corsario rra a vs 8 8 12 2 Environmental ss s co sa dct w sea o 8 8 12 3 Electrical ocurrida ar oa ew ed 8 8 12 4 Powered Cradle Battery Pack PN 20605 003 Li Ion 8 8 12 5 Agency Approvals o o 8 9 GPS Unit 245 Pies a hee ee bee rre aa 8 10 Active Transient Filter Power Supply o o o o oo 8 11 Accessories List 198 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories External Bar Code Readers 8 1 External Bar Code Readers Warning ALWAYS TURN THE TERMINAL OFF before connecting or disconnecting any bar code reader To connect a bar code read
21. 2 2 Preparing The 7035 For Operation AN Note For vehicle mount installation instructions refer to Installing 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals beginning on page 18 Preparing the 7035 terminal for operation includes installing the battery pack and 1f an external antenna is required connecting the antenna to the 7035 VAN Important All battery packs must be charged before use A description of battery chargers is provided in Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories beginning on page 203 2 2 1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna 7035s equipped with internal antennas do not require whip antennas A plastic cap covers the antenna connector on terminals with internal antennas If your site requires that external antennas the appropriate antenna will be shipped with your terminal Antenna Types on page 212 lists available antennas When you attach the antenna make certain that it is securely attached to the terminal Failure to do so can result in poor communication quality 2 2 2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing The 7035 hand held terminal operates with a Lithium Ion battery pack AN Important Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines listed on page 43 and also in the section titled Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 201 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Assembly And B
22. C 22 F Frozen electrolyte will damage the battery life and capacity CP U Am486 DX 33 derivative with 8k cache 4 MB Flash ROM BIOS DOS applications 8 MB RAM 228 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Memory Expansion Proprietary plug in card Electrical Power supply battery pack Charge time Capacity Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery storage temperature Battery life Charge cycles Performance monitor Display Active Area Backlight Control Text Mode Screen Formats Chapter 9 Specifications 7035 Hand Held Terminal Specifications 4 MB Flash ROM expandable to 8 MB 8 MB RAM expandable to 16 MB RAM depot upgradeable PN 20605 003 battery pack 7 4 V nominal 6 0 V to 8 4 V maximum for battery pack PN 20605 003 Fast charge typically 3 5 to 4 hours 2200 mAh at 7 4 V nominal 10 C to 45 C 50 F to 113 F 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 9 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7370 radio e 15 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7431 radio with backlight on 5 5 scan transactions per minute TESS emulation 20605 003 battery pack Based on typical 1 year cell degradation Other radios will differ Minimum of 500 charge cycles Identifies the need for pack replacement 62 x 62 mm 2 44 x 2 44 0 38 mm dot pitch Automated function Character Cell Character Height mm Lines x Column 6x8 3 04 18x
23. C 4 F to 140 F Life span Pack performance does not degrade below 80 of nominal under typical daily use over a 2 year period Based on one charge discharge cycle every day and 250 working days per year Charge Cycles Minimum of 500 charge cycles Charge Time Fast charge typically in 3 5 to 4 hours Performance Monitor Identifies the need for pack replacement Voltage 7 4 V nominal 6 0 V to 8 4 V maximum for battery pack PN 20605 003 Capacity 2200 mAh at 7 4 V nominal Weight 135 g nominal 202 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Battery Life Supported Chargers Memory Battery Gauge Graceful Power Fail Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories The 7942 In Unit Charger 9 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7370 radio 15 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7431 radio with backlight on 5 5 scan transactions per minute TESS emulation 20605 003 battery pack Based on typical 1 year cell degradation Other radios will differ Model 7967 6 gang custom charger Model 7942 In unit charger Model 7978 3 gang custom charger No memory effect Indicates remaining capacity 0 to 100 resolution 10 Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference Operator is notified when battery capacity is low 8 3 The 7942 In Unit Charger AN Important The 7035 cannot be switched on while it is inserted in the 7942 in unit charger In fact if the terminal is on when it is i
24. QY 120f5 Mode 10 Chk ITF Chk Include Chk Size Chars same as MSI PLESSEY 1 Chk Digit Include Chk continued on next page Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Size Chars same as QY Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus Mod 10 Chk ITF Chk Include Chk Size Chars same as Y IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Chk ITF Chk Include Chk Size Chars same as Scanner Barcode p 2of5 cont d Applications Name 1 Type 1 Settings TESS Auto Term Group only available with 802 1Q radios H Terminal H Host Conn H Screen App Parameter Font Size Invis NULL Char Set ISO Err Func Key IBM EBCDIC V Match Chr hee H Match Chr Upper Case t Characters DEC Misc Serial In Exclusive SI Mode SI Prefix SI Suffix SI FnKey Out SO Prefix _ SO Suffix SI FnKey Tests AutoRep Fn L AutoReb T O continued on next page Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual F 3 Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus F 4 Applications cont d Name 1 Type 1 Settings TESS Scanner ContNxtField Append Enter Append FO Mixed AIAG Rict if Alpha Beam Lockout Fields Field Order Enter To FO Enter On Arr Entry Mode Open Fky Only Video Normal All Fid Video Bold Ign Bcode fld Blink Reverse Enh Edit Mode Underline Valid Numerics Features kbd Locked
25. The GPS unit was designed to be used in conjunction with the Psion Teklogix Powered Sled Model 7937B the Lithium Ion Battery Pack PN 20605 003 and the Psion Teklogix Port Replicator TLX PN 21655 The GPS unit plugs directly into the Port Replicator which supplies the GPS unit with power from the Powered Sled supply and connects the data lines to the 7035 terminal The GPS unit should be mounted with a clear unobstructed view of the GPS satellites For optimal performance the GPS unit should be mounted in an area that provides exposure to as large a swath of unobstructed sky as possible a vehicle roof is an excellent choice Important Keep in mind that some windows have thermal and or UV filter or tint coatings that may shield satellite signals from the GPS receiver Psion Teklogix provides four types of Garmin mounting brackets to secure your GPS unit in position 8 10 Active Transient Filter Power Supply The Active Transient Filter Power Supply Model 8742 is designed to filter out large volumes of transients and in addition it provides a power supply TEKLOGIX 19893 VMT PRE REGULATOR SERIAL NUMBER MEESI INPUT 55 90V 1 5A OUTPUT 15V 33A Made in Canada Figure 8 4 Active Transient Filter Power Supply 220 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Active Transient Filter Power Supply AN Note Water will not harm the Pre Regulator Transient Suppre
26. To display an uppercase letter e Press the lt SHIFT gt key before typing an alpha character 3 8 2 Accessing AZERTY Function Keys Vehicle mount terminals are available in two keyboard types F1 to F6 and Fl to FIO see 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards on page 47 for a brief description Depending on which keyboard type you are using accessing function keys differs slightly These differences are highlighted in this section Important Make certain that the appropriate keyboard type F1 to F6 or F1 to F10 is selected in the Keyboard Type parameter see Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only on page 130 3 8 2 1 FI To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access Fl To F10 keyboards have a total of 30 function keys the first six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 30 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt FI0 gt The first ten function keys on these vehicle mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard that is a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt are the bright yellow keys located in the upper left portion of the keyboard e To access function lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on through to lt F10 gt Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 77 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 K
27. an access point is not required In an Infrastructure network terminals must pass data through an access point terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network Channel AN Important The Channel parameter takes effect only when the Network parameter is set to Adhoc The channel number you choose must be the same for all terminals on the network that are set to Adhoc WEP Encrypt Wired Equivalent Privacy m WEP Encrypt Key 1 12345 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Tx Key 1 AN Note This parameter is designed for use with Lucent WaveLAN 802 Silver and Gold PC cards only If another type of WaveLAN PC card is installed in your terminal WEP Encrypt must be disabled set to N If the PC card installed in your terminal is not a WaveLAN card WEP Encrypt will not appear in the Radio menu Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 3 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios When this parameter is configured radio traffic is encrypted to protect it from electronic eavesdroppers The WEP Encrypt sub menu provides four encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 The transmit key TX Key 1 is used to define which encryption key will be used to encrypt transmissions Encryption Keys Key to Key 4 Encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 accept either ASCII or hex values Keep the following in mind when assigning
28. while charging the terminal will signal the cradle to immediately stop the charge process Flashing Orange e Cradle is locked e Terminal is OFF e Battery pack PN 20605 003 is installed e Battery temperature is lower than 10 C or higher than 45 C Charg ing will begin when battery within correct temperature range Flashing Red e Cradle is locked e Terminal is ON and PN 20605 003 battery is installed e Terminal running off battery pack not cradle Table 8 3 Charger Indicators 8 8 12 Specifications 8 8 12 1 Physical Dimensions W x Hx D 115 x 203 x 115 mm 4 5 x 8 0 x 4 5 Plastic cradle Metal chassis Weight Jet Black Bayer Makroblend EL 700 16 AWG cold rolled steel black enamel over yellow chromate plate 1 4 kg 3 09 Ibs 218 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 8 8 12 2 8 8 12 3 Environmental Operating temperature Storage temperature Charge mode Discharge mode Relative humidity Shock Vibration Electrical Target pack type Charge sites Charge mode Operation under charge Input power Input connector Electrical interface Pin out Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Environmental 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F 40 Cto 60 C 40 F to 140 F 10 C to 45 C 50 F to 113 F 20 Cto 60 C 4 F to 140 F 10 to 90 non condensing 25 G with an 11 ms rise time on all axes Random 3 axis 1 5g RMS 4 500 Hz
29. 142 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Code 11 1 6 3 9 Code II Code 11 1 Chk Digit N 2 Chk Digits Y Include Chk N Size Chars Chk Digit If this parameter is enabled set to Y it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit 2 Chk Digits If this parameter is enabled set to Y it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Include Chk If Include Chk is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 71 63 10 12 of 5 1 2 0 5 Mod 10 Chk N ITF Chk N Include Chk N Size Chars Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit ITF Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 143 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters MSI PLESSY Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 1 6 3 11 MSI PLESSY MSI PLESSY 1 Chk Digit Include Chk Size Chars Chk Digit If this parameter is enabled set to Y
30. 20 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Mounting The 8260 Terminal 2 3 3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal 18452 001 Horizontal vertical cradle 15 15 foot cable 19448 6 foot cable 19449 10 inch cable 18239 A en cr Keyboard cradle 18451 Cradle support plate Figure 2 5 8260 Mounting Options Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Connecting The 8255 8260 Antenna o There are three mounting options available Figure 2 5 on page 21 provides a visual illustration of the mounting options 1 The horizontal vertical mounting cradle PN 18452 and the keyboard cradle PN 18239 2 The combined mounting option using the horizontal vertical mounting cradle PN 18452 001 the keyboard cradle PN 18239 and the cradle support plate PN 18451 3 Using the terminal cradle PN 18198 for the display the cradle mount ing plate PN 18197 and the keyboard cradle PN 18239 2 3 4 Connecting The 8255 8260 Antenna Warning Operating the terminal without an antenna may damage the radio The antenna consists of the antenna whip and a magnetic mount with cable To attach it follow the guidelines below e For narrow band and WAN radios turn the antenna in a clockwise direction e For spread spectrum radios turn the antenna in a counter clockwise direction The antenna works best w
31. 60 minutes PN 20605 003 1 site for in unit charging Fast charge CCCV Not permitted Charging will stop when terminal is turned ON Model 7937B 11 16 VDC 36 W max Model 7937C 10 55 VDC 36 W max AMP type CPC 206153 1 on flying lead 4 spring loaded heavy duty pogo type pins in base of unit BAT BAT TEMP DATA 8 8 12 4 Powered Cradle Battery Pack PN 20605 003 Li lon This battery uses 2200 mAh Li ion cells with a charge specification of 10 C to 45 C 50 F to 113 F and a discharge specification of 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 E This pack has an internal MOSFET cell disconnect When the 7035 is installed in the cradle and is turned off the battery will charge When the 7035 is turned on the terminal will draw power from the cradle the battery pack will not discharge 8 8 12 5 Agency Approvals USA Canada Europe FCC Part 15 EMI ICES 003 CSA C108 8 M1983 EMI European CE mark 72 73 EEC Low Voltage Directive 89 336 EEC EMC Directive Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 219 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories GPS Unit 8 9 GPS Unit The 7035 terminal can support an optional GPS unit This unit a Garmin GPS 35HVS TLX PN 30969 is a complete GPS receiver and antenna contained in a small water resistant package The Garmin GPS 35HVS can track up to 12 satellites at a time while providing fast time to first fix and one second navigation updates
32. 93 10111010 186 BA 10010100 148 6 94 1011 1011 187 BB 10010101 149 95 10111100 188 BC 10010110 150 96 1011 1101 189 BD 1001 0111 151 97 10111110 190 BE 1001 1000 152 y 98 1011 1111 191 BF 1001 1001 153 O 99 11000000 192 CO 1001 1010 154 U 9A 1100 0001 193 C1 1001 1011 155 9B 11000010 194 C2 1001 1100 156 9C 1100 0011 195 C3 1001 1101 157 9D 11000100 196 C4 10011110 158 P 9E 1100 0101 197 C5 1001 1111 159 f OF 11000110 198 C6 10100000 160 a A0 1100 0111 199 C7 10100001 161 i A1 1100 1000 200 C8 10100010 162 6 A2 11001001 201 C9 1010 0011 163 A3 1100 1010 202 CA 10100100 164 fi A4 1100 1011 203 CB 10100101 165 A5 1100 1100 204 CC 10100110 166 a A6 1100 1101 205 CD 1010 0111 167 AT 1100 1110 206 CE 1010 1000 168 A8 1100 1111 207 CF 1010 1010 169 _ A9 11010000 208 DO 1010 1010 170 AA 11010001 209 D1 1010 1011 171 J AB 11010010 210 D2 10101100 172 T AC 1101 0011 211 D3 1010 1101 173 i AD 11010100 212 D4 10101110 174 AE 11010101 213 D5 1010 1111 175 AF 11010110 214 D6 10110000 176 BO 1101 0111 215 D7 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual C 3 Appendix C ASCII Character Table BINARY DEC ASCII HEX BINARY 128 641 3211618141211 11011000 216 D8 OCTAL 5121641811 11011001
33. Customer will not knowingly without prior authorization if required export or re export the Product Software or the Documentation in any medium without the appropriate United States and foreign government licenses The transfer or export of the software outside the U S may require a license from the Bureau of Export Administration For questions call BXA at 202 482 4811 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XV APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY Declaration Of Conformity Product 7035 Hand Held Terminal Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Conformity Declared EN 55022 1994 Class B ETS 300 328 1996 Al 1997 to Standards EN 50082 1 EN 55024 1998 ETS 300 683 1997 ETS 300 826 1997 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 0 5kV on I O lines EN 61000 4 6 3VRMS 150kHz 80MHz Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada LSN 7J9 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in the European La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 Community 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Data Collecting Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario January 14
34. Home Agent Key 1 88 Home Agent SPI 788 home key function 94 Host ANSI Telnet Settings 149 Host TESS Connection Type 161 Host Char Set ANSI 154 Host Connection ANSI 148 TESS 160 Host Echo 157 host select CTRL h 99 HP high performance scanner 130 I VO fields 94 IATA 2of5 145 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 94 Idle Poll Limit D 8 Inn 132 In Serial In 766 inbyte received bytes 85 Inc Country 138 Include Chk 36 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 Include Chk D 2 of 5 symbology 145 Include Chk I 2 of 5 symbology 144 Include Sym Code 128 38 Inc Num Sys 141 142 incrementing parameters 114 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual IX Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal indicators 29 LED functions 28 onscreen messages 29 scanner message 36 inerrs received packets w errors 85 Infra and Adhoc networks D 3 D 10 Infrared IrDA port using 37 initialized messages transmitted xi TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 initialized messages transmitted 802 IQv1 xi See xi transmitted initialize messages 88 initialized messages transmitted 802 IQv2 x1 See xi transmitted initialize messages 88 Initial RTT D 7 inpkts received packets 85 input bar code only fields 94 bar code reader 799 Input tmo 79 insert mode 171 Open Fky Only 7 replace mode 171 Retry Tmo 179 serial I O fields 94 Input Tmo 779 Insert ANSI Keyboard parameter 158 Insert mod
35. LCD Only 12 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation 2 1 Preparing Terminals For Operation 15 2 1 1 Client Side Emulation Software 15 2 2 Preparing The 7035 For Operation o o 15 2 2 1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna 15 2 2 2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing 15 2 2 3 Attaching The 7035 Hand Strap Or The Pistol Grip 17 2 3 Installing 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals 18 2 3 1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal 18 2 3 2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 19 2 3 3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal 21 2 3 4 Connecting The 8255 8260 Antenna 22 2 3 5 Installing The Cables o o 22 2 3 6 Installing The Extension Power Cable 23 2 4 Turning The Terminals On And Off 24 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents 2 4 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal 2 4 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals 2 5 Resetting Terminals s o s e as ea o ooo e 2 5 1 Resetting The 7033 o oo 2 5 2 Resetting The 8255 And8260 2 6 Working With The Startup Display Menu 2 6 1 The Display Menu 2 The Keyboard os eo a ass Rad A A A a Sas 2 8 Terminal Indicators o e e 201 LEDS ai e aras e a lea 2 8 2 The Status
36. Normal scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 normal video attribute 54 171 NULL characters TESS 164 number of columns ANSI 152 of columns TESS 161 of pages ANSI 151 of rows ANSI 152 of rows TESS 162 Terminal ANSI 103 148 Terminal TESS 93 number system digit 4 142 numeric fields Rjct if Alpha 170 numeric parameters 114 numeric parameters minimum maximum limits to 714 O Off amp On buttons 24 offices list 3 A 3 off line terminal Power Off Time D 18 PwrOFF time D 22 On amp Off button 24 onscreen indicators 29 30 On Time 7035 backlight 25 Open Fky Only 171 operating channel TRX7370 86 operating channel 802 11 SS 86 Options parameters for scanning 131 ORANGE and BLUE keys how touse 48 order of fields in TESS screen 170 Origin scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 1 62 Out n 132 Out Serial Out 68 outbyte sent bytes 85 outerrs packet send errors 85 outpkts sent packets 85 P Pack 219 packet errors send outerrs 85 packets dropped drppkt 85 packet send errors outerrs 85 packet size ethernet 185 packets received inpkts 85 packets sent outpkts 85 packets w errors received inerrs 85 pages Columns ANSI 152 Columns TESS 6 Pages ANSI 151 positioning 162 reprinting 99 Rows ANSI 752 Rows TESS 162 size shape 152 Pages ANSI 151 Pages Saved TESS 162 Palette Remap 727 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XIII Index Boldface indicates a pa
37. Options Barcode 1 6 1 Type Typ Range Internal Standard Standard Long Range High Vis 2 D External Non Decoded Non Decoded Wand The Type sub menu is used to indicate the type of internal and or external scanner being used The 7035 hand held terminal can support both an internal and an external scanner at the same time Internal 7035 Only AN Note If you are using an Advanced Long Range ALR scanner choose the Long Range setting If you are using an High Performance HP scanner choose either the Standard or High Visibility setting Keep in mind also that if you are using a 2 D scanner Console 2 in the Ports menu is set to Disable by default it cannot be configured The Internal parameter must match the type of internal scanner installed in the 7035 Long Range High Visibility Standard or 2 D If an internal scanner has not been installed set this parameter to None 130 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual AN Note The 2 D internal scanner is configured by the 7035 software on startup Beyond selecting the 2 D scanner type no configuration is required However the scan engine can be misconfigured if you scan a Symbol SE 2223 configuration bar code To reset the engine to the appropriate default 2 D settings scan the Set All Defaults bar code Set All Defaults below AN Important When you select 2 D as the intern
38. Radio Parameters Channel Channel Enable Chan enable Rang CH 1 enable Y Y N o o o CH 7 enable Y Y N These parameters are used to enable Y or disable N up to 7 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the 902 spread spectrum radio Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel Channel F and also makes the channel available for channel searching If for example the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled the terminal may roam through all 7 channels Note that the Channel Enable menu only displays channels that have been configured with frequencies Channel Auto Chan Auto Range gt Next ch auto 1 0 7 o o o Next ch auto 7 0 7 These parameters are available in the Chan auto sub menu Next ch auto determines the order of the auto switched channels In the first Next ch auto parameter enter the number of the first channel to which you want the terminal to consider switching In the next parameter enter the next channel and so on Enter 0 zero for no channel D 20 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters WLAN Timing D 4 2 WLAN Timing WLAN Timing Rang Reinit tmo 10 5 20 Reinit tmo Reinit tmo controls how soon a terminal sends a warm initialize message to the controller
39. Result Time The value assigned to the Result Time parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the terminal screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter AN Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired perform an unsuccessful scan 134 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Barcode 1 6 3 Barcode All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this menu For each symbology there are options in a sub menu The terminal automatically discriminates between the selected codes Some restrictions may apply Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable set to Y only those codes that are required by the application Barcode Code 39 G PC E Codabar Code 93 Code 11 2 Of 5 MSI PLESSY D 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 K222222KKKKK 7 6 3 1 Code 39 Code 39 Full Ascii Mod 43 Chk Mod 10 Chk Include Chk ATAG Strip Err Accept Size Chars Z2Z222232Z Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled set to Y the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Teklogix 7035
40. Security Gateway POA using Access AirFortrass a Paint Secure Client 4 e Industrial Scanner Using Secure Client Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual E 1 Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client Loading AirFortress Secure Client Software E 2 Loading Airfortress Secure Client Software The AirFortress driver and configuration tool must be installed on the writable drive of the 7035 using a Psion Teklogix serial cable or console cable AN Note Although either type of cable can be used a serial cable is recommended e Exit to DOS If you are running Tekterm press lt ALT gt and type x e Choose DOS prompt from the startup menu and enter your password e Atthe DOS prompt type a to change the default drive to A At the A drive e Run the upload utility on the 7035 ymodem If you are using a serial cable e Type y to start the ymodem program at 57600 baud e Configure your terminal emulator program for a rate of 57600 e Use your terminal emulator program ymodem send function to send the AirFortress driver fsdrvr exe e Repeat the procedure for the configuration utility fscfg exe If you are using a console cable the terminal emulator should be set to 4800 bps e Type ymodem y4800 2 and upload the file from your terminal emulator using the ymodem send function When the files have successfully uploaded e Reboot the terminal exit to DOS and run fscfg
41. Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 87 Chapter 4 Tekterm 802 1Qv1 Radio Statistics Screen 88 e xi e ra e xa e bt e xr e rt e va e Address Info number of initializations with the network controller number of received acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in xm number of transmitted acknowledgements Normally this number should match the value in rm beacon timeouts Number of times the beacon has not been received as expected number of retransmissions This number should remain low if radio coverage is adequate average round trip time This number represents the millisec onds taken to send a message and receive a response from the the base station variance of the round trip time this information is most useful then the terminal is configured using auto radio address and or auto terminal number In this case two sessions are configured one ANSI and one TESS The SNMP session is established automatically MAC ADDR the MAC address of the radio card installed in the terminal e Serial NO e SysName e GroupName terminal serial address corresponds with the Name configured in the SNMP menu corresponds with the Group Name configured in the SNMP menu Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 4 Tekterm 802 10v2 Radio Statistics Screen 4 4 5 802 10v2 Radio Statistics Screen Important Unlike other statistics
42. When not in use 8260 LCD vehicle mount freezer terminals should be stored in temperatures above 0 C 32 F e To prevent keyboard keys from freezing up the keyboard should be mounted off the horizontal plane This allows water to run off the keyboard and prevents it from pooling on the keypad freezing and finally physically jamming the keys Mounting the keyboard off the horizontal plane also prevents water from dripping onto the keypad area Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 41 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Maintenance gt e 2 13 Maintenance This section describes the measures that should be added to your equipment maintenance routine 2 13 1 Cleaning All Terminals Terminals can be cleaned with mild detergent and water Ink marks on the keyboard can be removed using a cotton ball moistened with isopropyl alcohol Warning Do not immerse the unit in water Never use strong cleansers 2 ve 1035 Special Instructions The 7035 terminal has a plastic case that is susceptible to certain chemicals It is partially soluble in aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions Avoid these solvents Do not use Loctite brand or other adhesives to secure screws used to attach accessories to the case of the 7035 since the adhesive may damage the plastic unless the adhesives are specifically formulated for plastics e The 7035 scanner IrDA port and display
43. at the site in which a terminal is operating A amp L Note Parameters can also be remotely modified using SNMP 1 2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu Normally the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on Exiting Tekterm To launch the Parameters menu you first need to exit the Tekterm application e Press lt ALT gt and type the letter x The start up Display Menu appears on the terminal screen From this menu you can launch the Parameters menu relaunch the Tekterm application or go to the DOS prompt 1 Display Menu J Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt Qu o Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 111 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu Launching The Display Menu To access any of these options type the letter corresponding to the item you want to access To launch the Parameters menu e Type the letter a A Password screen is displayed r Password gt AN Note A password is not requested when the terminal emulation application is launched A Supervisory or a Psion Teklogix level password is required to access the complete Parameters menu or the DOS prompt e Type your supervisory level password The default Sup Password is 123456 e Press lt ENTER gt A Important To protect against accidental changes to the terminal parameter s
44. case the battery is no longer useful and the battery should be returned to Teklogix Inc for proper disposal Return addresses are listed on page 201 e The battery is not compatible with this charger e The battery temperature is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is inhibited Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge 8 4 4 7967 Charger pene Charge Sites Compatibility as batteries only Connection Via contacts at top of battery pack Charge Operation Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention Indicators display charge status Limitations Will not charge NiMH batteries However if a NIMH battery is inserted in this charger neither the battery nor the charger will be damaged 208 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories 7978 Gang Charger 8 5 7978 Gang Charger The 7978 Gang charger can charge up to three Lithium Ion batteries at one time 8 5 1 Connecting The Power Source The 7978 Gang Charger is powered with an external universal AC power supply It accepts voltages ranging from 100 240 volts AC 50 60 Hz The power supply has an IEC 20 type connector for the AC input and a DC output cord with attached plug e Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC 320 type connector on the external power supply e Plug the power supply DC output cord with attac
45. it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 7 6 3 12 D2 of 5 D2 of 5 Mod 10 Chk N ITF Chk N Include Chk N Size Chars Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the Mod 10 check digit is calculated This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit 144 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters IATA 2 of 5 ITF Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the ITF 14 16 Mod10 check digit is calculated Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 1 6 3 13 IATA 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Chk N ITF Chk N Include Chk N Size Chars Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the Mod 10 check digit is calculated ITF Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the ITF 14 16 Mod 10 check digit is calculated Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 145 Chapt
46. lt ORANGE gt key and then press the lt F1 gt key e To access lt F12 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing BLUE Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt Each of these function keys is displayed in a blue box in the upper right corner of function keys lt F1 gt to lt 10 gt To access function keys lt F21 gt to lt F30 gt you ll need to press the lt BLUE gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F10 gt For example e To access lt F21 gt press the lt BLUE gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F22 gt press lt BLUE gt lt F2 gt and so on 68 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access 3 6 2 2 FI To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access F1 To F6 vehicle mount keyboards have a total of 36 function keys the first six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 30 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt F6 gt The first six function keys on a F1 To F6 keyboard are directly accessible from the keyboard That is they are dedicated function keys a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F6 gt are the bright yellow keys located in the upper left portion of the keyboard e To access lt Fl gt press lt F1 gt e To access lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on to lt F6 gt Accessing
47. o 73 3 7 2 1 F1 To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access 73 3 7 2 2 F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access 74 3 7 3 Accessing ABC Macro KeyS o o 76 3 7 3 1 F1 To F10 Keyboard Macro Keys 76 3 7 3 2 F1 To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access 76 3 8 AZERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards o o 77 3 8 1 Accessing Alpha Keys o o 77 3 8 2 Accessing AZERTY Function Keys 77 3 8 2 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access 77 3 8 2 2 Fl To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access 78 3 8 3 Accessing AZERTY Macro Keys 0 80 3 8 3 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Macro Key Access 80 3 8 3 2 Fl To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access 80 46 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Keyboard Layouts 3 1 Keyboard Layouts Depending on the type of terminal you use hand held or vehicle mount and the type of keyboard chosen keyboard operation varies slightly Operating instructions in this chapter are described section by section according to keyboard type 3 1 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal Keyboards 7035 hand helds are available with three keyboard layouts 44 key 56 key and 36 key The function of each of these keyboards is described in the following sections e 44 key Page 57 e
48. oso o o 120 dz Key CICK criar id ew a 121 LX One Shot Mod e seanse 4 ape Boe we Bah a Bo Se 121 7 5 4 TypematicRpt o o aeaa 122 TXS Caps LocK O se ao e248 8 tet esa een he as 123 196 Panig 2 6 244 OY eee eee ee we ew 123 Rd Backlight s a seasea 4 ob ah ae eee da 125 198 FONSI a 4 444 ae ase Sa AS 127 TI Cursor Type a mosat Ae bk ho Sie oe Boe ee oe 127 io A0 Palette Remap cis ie Ge we Ges 127 7 5 11 Watchdog TIMET o o ooo 128 73 12 Power 7035 Only cocos tcs as 129 7 5 13 SerialNumber o oo a A a A 129 7 5 14 Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only 130 O MSCAMMEF pr ah a oe a oe Bs 130 HOA Typ esre srci ee ee rara 130 TOZ OPUONS Ge ed wre eee as ak ESE as 131 TO Barcode duo soea ae al be Sa Ge A ana Ge Sd 135 i Applications 6 0 6 ade 4 se Sea ha a Se a He a 146 LAA ANSI Settings gc se gg a BA we AR eo AS 147 1 7 2 TESS Settings 2 465 e be es ee de bee ews 159 TS View Manager socca oaa eae PA oe ee A a 173 7 9 GPS Global Positioning System Receiver 175 7 10 Ports Serial 1 AndConsole2 204 176 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Vv vi Contents 7 10 1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options 176 7 10 2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings 177 7 11 Global Macros o w ces a eee woe Aw ek ee ee 181 7 11 1 Displaying The Global MacrosMenu 181 7 11 2 Displa
49. parameter type a supervisory level password that will be easy for you to remember but not easy for your colleagues to discover The password can include a maximum of six alphabetic and or numeric characters e Press lt F4 gt to save the new password AN Important Once you choose a password it is critical that you set all the terminals to the same password write down your password and keep it in a secure place If you lose your password your terminal parameters can only be changed by Psion Teklogix personnel However Psion Teklogix can only help you if the Allow Teklogix parameter was set to Y Refer to Allow Teklogix on page 194 for details 1 16 2 Allow Teklogix Setting this parameter to Y allows Psion Teklogix personnel to use their support level password to access terminal parameters If Allow Teklogix is set to N only your supervisory level password can be used to access your terminal parameters e Warning If you set this parameter to N the Psion Teklogix support level password will be rejected Keep in mind that if you then lose your supervisory level password you will need to clear the entire configuration setup on all terminals to gain access to the parameter menus 194 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Tekterm Exit Password 1 16 3 Tekterm Exit Password Tekterm Range gt Exit Password N Y N When this
50. see text LEAP N see text CIS Data see text A N Important Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key for a minimum of six seconds ESSID The ESSID Extended Service Set Identifier is a string of characters to a maximum of 32 that the terminal uses to determine with which access points 1t can communi cate The terminal will only communicate with access points configured with the same ESSID If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if ANY is entered the terminal will communicate with any available access point Station The value entered in this parameter to a maximum of 32 characters is used to identify the terminal an 802 11 station for diagnostic purposes Data Rate The value entered in this parameter specifies the data rate to be used for message transmission The data rate can be set to one of the following Auto 1Mbit 2Mbit 5 5Mbit or 11Mbit D 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters Pwr Saving When this parameter is enabled set to Y the radio operates in power saving mode utilizing the parameters listed in this sub menu Pwr Saving TxPower 100 RXMode Normal PwrMode CAM Range 0 100 Unicast No Multicast PSP FASTPSP Tx Power T
51. the serial input and serial output fields are configured as the screen sets are created using the Wintsf screen editor A serial in field is an Entry field with the serial attribute box checked and a serial out field is a Fixed field with the serial attribute box checked refer to the 7035 8255 8260 Software Development Kit User Manual PN 80455 AN Important If you are using serial input fields make sure the SI Mode parameter is set to field When SI Mode is set to command serial input is not displayed on the terminal screen It is transmitted directly with a TESS response command To use this mode the TSDK TESS message macro TESS_RESP_SERIAL_INPUT will identify the received message as input data from the terminal serial port AN Serial Notes I Field mode is supported by both emulations and Software Development Kits Command mode is only supported by Software Development Kits 2 You can configure the terminal to automatically transmit data received through the serial port without user intervention When SI Mode is set to Field automatic transmission of serial data can be done by setting the SI Fnkey parameter to the desired function key When SI Mode is set to Command automatic transmission is based on the configuration of the Port parameters as well as the SI Prefix and ST Suffix values If the suffix and prefix values are not used set to zero serial data i
52. when the lt CTRL gt key is locked on the CTRL LED stays on solidly If a key has been activated but is not locked on the CTRL LED blinks 2 8 2 The Status Area 7035 Only The 7035 terminal has a status area at the bottom of the terminal screen that indicates which modifier keys are currently active The key or keys pressed are displayed in lowercase letters at the bottom of the screen For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key it is displayed as ctrl in the status area The status area also indicates whether or not the function of a modifier key has been locked on Keys that have been locked on are displayed in the status area in uppercase letters Refer to One Shot Mode on page 121 for details about locking modifier keys Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only beginning on page 29 lists all possible status area messages 28 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only 2 8 3 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only Onscreen indicators appear in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate a variety of terminal conditions AN Note Only the 7035 hand held terminal is equipped with a status area The vehicle mount terminals use LEDs to indicate various terminal states AN Important The One Shot Mode parameters described on page 121 are used to alter the behaviour of the 7035
53. 2 000 G 2 000 G Table 9 2 SEI200ALR And SE2223 2 D Scanner Specifications Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 237 Chapter 9 Specifications Internal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only Pitch a yo Side View Scan Beam Skew Top View S T Scan Pattern Specular Dead Zone A i _ Side View Scan Beam Roll aaa AT fa Side View Scan Beam Pitch Angle Barcode Surface gt Barcode Surface Figure 9 1 Pitch Skew And Specular Dead Zone 238 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 9 10 1 Decode Zones Chapter 9 Specifications Bar Code Spread Spectrum Seton Long Range ar kane Min Max Min Max Min Max 5 mil 3 0 4 5 7 5 mil 3 0 8 5 10mil 2 5 12 5 13 0 17 5 15mil 2 5 18 5 8 5 33 5 20 0 50 0 20 mil 2 5 20 5 9 5 38 5 30 0 60 0 40 mil 3 0 29 5 9 5 79 5 30 0 98 0 55mil 3 5 35 5 9 5 89 5 27 0 115 0 Table 9 3 Decode Zones Spread Spectrum HP LR And ALR Bar Code Narrow Band Peforhance Long Range iia ie Min Max Min Max Min Max 5 mil 3 0 5 0 7 5 mil 2 75 9 0 10mil 2 5 13 0 13 0 18 0 15mil 2 5 19 0 9 0 34 0 20 0 50 0 20 mil 2 5 21 0 9 0 39 0 30 0 60 0 40 mil 3 0 30 0 10 0 80 0 30 0 98 0 55mil 4 0 36 0 10 0
54. 2 10 3 Scanning Techniques se se e ci cease a e e E a 37 2 11 Infrared IrDA Port 7035 Only e s ecse a a a a a 37 2 12 Low Temperature Freezer and Outdoor Terminals 38 2 12 1 Hand Held Terminals 38 2 12 2 Vehicle Mount Terminals o o o 38 2 12 3 Important Operating Instructions o 39 2 12 3 1 For All Freezer Terminals 39 2 12 3 2 For Hand Held Terminals Only 40 2 12 3 3 For Vehicle Mount Terminals Only 41 2 13 MamtenanCe concisa ee ORE DOS RE wR Ds 42 2 13 1 Cleaning All Terminals 42 2 13 2 7035 Special Instructions o o 42 2 13 3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery o 42 14 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Preparing Terminals For Operation 2 1 Preparing Terminals For Operation This section of the manual details the basic steps you ll need to prepare your hand held and vehicle mount terminals for operation 2 1 1 Client Side Emulation Software For terminals equipped with the Client Side Emulation feature you ll need to review the Connect Inc manual Twin Client Reference for the 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals manufactured by Psion Teklogix that is shipped with your client side emulation terminal It details how to install and activate the client side emulation software
55. 2 Accessing ABC Function Keys Vehicle mount terminals are available in two keyboard types F1 to F6 and Fl to F10 see 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards on page 47 for a brief description Depending on which keyboard type you are using accessing function keys differs slightly These differences are highlighted in this section Important Make certain that the appropriate keyboard type F1 to F6 or F1 to F10 is selected in the Keyboard Type parameter see Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only on page 130 3 7 2 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access Fl To F10 keyboards have a total of 30 function keys the first ten of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 20 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt FI0 gt The first ten function keys on vehicle mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard That is they are dedicated function keys a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt are the bright yellow keys located along the upper portion of the keyboard Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 73 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access For example e To access function key lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on to lt F10 gt Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt FI1
56. 2003 Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S A France January 14 2003 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual xvii Approvals And Safety Summary Declaration Of Conformity Product 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Conformity Declared EN 55022 1998 Class B ETS 300 826 1997 to Standards EN 50082 1 1997 ETS 300 683 1997 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 1kV on AC line EN 61000 4 5 AC line 2kV Common 1kV Diff mode EN 61000 4 6 3VRMS 150kHz 80MHz AC line EN 61000 4 11 AC Mains Ports ISO 7637 1 1990 ISO 7637 2 1990 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 A11 Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Blvd Mississauga Ontario Canada LSN 7J9 Year of Manufacture 1999 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in European Community La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Data Collecting Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario January 14 2003 Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sa
57. 500 mA fuse Alarm 24 BEEP External beeper output B 4 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255 60 Expansion Port I O Connector 36 Pin PCR Function Pi Signal Name Description EMI Shield SHIELD System ground EXP_PORT 7 Reserved for future expansion EXP_PORT 8 Reserved for future expansion EXP_PORT 9 Reserved for future expansion Keyboard GND For Teklogix use only Keyboard 5 V For Teklogix use only Keyboard CLK For Teklogix use only Keyboard Data For Teklogix use only Output handshake signal for RS 232 port 1 to processor Input handshake signal for RS 232 port 1 to RTS_B RS 232 34 CTS_B Port 1 processor 35 TX_DATA_B Output data for RS 232 port 1 to processor 36 RX_DATA_B Input data for RS 232 port 1 to processor Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual B 5 Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Internal Scanner Connector B 4 Internal Scanner Connector Pin Signal Name Description 1 SHIELD Chassis ground 2 SV_SCAN_PWR 5 V scanner power software switched RANGE_LIMIT TARGET DOT Enables range limiter function to improve bar code discrimination at short distances out put active low for standard range 7035 Enables aim dot for 7035 LR long range 4 LASER_ENABLE Enables scanner laser output active low
58. 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client Troubleshooting Diagnostics E 3 5 Troubleshooting Diagnostics The information provided under the Diagnostics option will help you troubleshoot the terminal and verify security settings The following diagnostic information can be viewed Physical device identifier assigned to the device Encryption algorithm and current operating status on or off Device ID for the AirFortress Gateway AF1100 with which the device is communicating Version of the AirFortress and the configuration database Flags used by technical support To view these diagnostics e Choose Diagnostics from the startup menu e Type N to move to the next Diagnostic screen or type M to return to the startup menu Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual E 5 APPENDIX PARAMETER TREES El Parameters Menus System _ Volume Ll Key Clic one y Duration One Shot Mode Orange Key 1 Shot 1 Shot Lock Q Lock A ey Shift toy same as Control Key The vehicle mount One Shot menu lists only the Orange and Blue Key options The sub menu 1 Shot 1 Shot Lock amp Lock displayed here along with the Alt Shift amp Control Key options are reserved for the 7035 hand held terminal Typematic Repeat Delay Rate Test Caps Lock On Panning Auto Pan Left Margin Right Margi
59. 77 e ABC Page 73 54 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions The Macro Keys Softkeys Softkeys are preprogrammed function keys that perform specific actions in the menus Softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen to identify the function of each key Function Key Softkey Functions lt F1 gt NEXT Displays the next sub menu lt F2 gt PREVIOUS Displays the previous menu DEFAULT Restores all parameters to the factory settings lt F3 gt even after lt F4 gt has been pressed to save the changes made to parameters lt F4 gt SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value Table 3 1 Softkey Functions In Parameter Manager 3 2 6 The Macro Keys A amp L Note Accessing macro keys varies depending on the type of terminal and key board you are using Refer to the appropriate section s listed below 7035 Hand Held Keyboards e 44 key Page 58 e 56 key Page 60 e 36 key Page 64 8255 amp 8260 Vehicle Mount Keyboards e QWERTY Page 70 e ABC Page 76 e AZERTY Page 80 Both 7035 hand held terminals and 8255 8260 vehicle mounts provide macro keys These keys can be programmed to insert a text string at the cursor position and can also be programmed to execute the function of the following keys lt ENTER gt lt DEL gt lt CLR gt lt BLUE gt lt DEL gt any function key including the l
60. 9 11 Power Management 7035 Only 0 0 240 9 11 1 Power Save States cu ack a uria eee ee aed eS 240 9 12 Lithium Ion Battery Pack 7035 Only 241 Appendices Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices A1 SUppOItS rviceSis suis ads BA a ee A A 1 A 1 1 Canada and USA Technical Support and Repair Services A 1 A 1 2 International SUppOrt o o A 1 Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams B 1 7035 Peripheral Port I O Connector 28 Pin PCR B 1 B 2 8255 60 Peripheral Port I O Connector 28 Pin PCR B 2 B 3 8255 60 Expansion Port I O Connector 36 Pin PCR B 4 B 4 Internal Scanner Connector e 0 000 B 6 B 5 Flash Serial Download Cable B 6 B 6 28 Pin PCR To 8 Pin DIN Connector PN 19726 B 7 B 7 28 Pin PCR To 7 Pin DIN Connector PN 19727 B 7 B 8 Flash Serial Download Cable PN 20075 B 8 B 9 Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable PN 30092 B 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents Appendix C ASCII Character Table Appendix D Radio Parameters D 1 TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radi0S D 1 D 2 TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters D 8 D 3 TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters D 13 D3 Cellular goa ace area au a aa a aS A D 13 DS2 Channel se gs sipa ds e ee a D 14 D33 Poll TIMIDE os ea S
61. 90 0 27 0 115 0 Table 9 4 Decode Zones Narrow Band HP LR And ALR Raster Laser Scanner Bar Code Spread Spectrum 2D Bar Codes 2223 Min Max 6 5 mil 2 5 6 5 10 mil 2 5 9 5 15 mil 2 5 15 5 Table 9 5 Decode Zones 2 D Scanner Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Decode Zones 239 Chapter 9 Specifications Power Management 7035 Only 9 11 Power Management 7035 Only BIOS Compatibility Advanced Power Management APM BIOS Interface Specification Rev 1 2 9 11 1 Power Save States System power states are based on the APM definitions APM Enabled APM Standby APM Suspend Off The terminal is in full power state All functions are active and system power is managed The link indicator is displayed in uppercase letters showing that the radio is running at full power The terminal is in low power state with most devices in low power mode The link indicator is displayed in lowercase letters showing that the radio is in low power state The CPU clock is slowed or stopped The system state is fully retained and the terminal returns to APM Enabled full power state quickly when for example the operator presses a key or scans a bar code This state is not evident to the operator The terminal enters Suspend state from APM Standby state after a configurable period of inactivity The terminal also enters Suspend
62. Appl Mode Echo Mode The available echo modes are Smart This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer The terminal displays all printable characters on the screen before sending them to the host The terminal compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and alters the display if the host echoes are different The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25 Any addi tional characters are sent to the host but are not displayed When the terminal is in insert mode smart echo is disabled 156 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Keyboard entering a password press lt ALT gt and type period Characters will be replaced with a series of periods until you press the lt ENTER gt key Local In this mode any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host Certain keys cause additional action at the terminal as shown in Table 7 2 on page 157 A Important To suspend Smart echo mode if for example you are Host In this mode the terminal sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host Key Function In Newline mode this key moves the cursor to the first column ENTER of the next line In line feed mode this key moves the cursor to column one of the cur
63. Area 7035 Only 2 8 3 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only ZOA Softkeys x ac doa a a a a 2 8 5 The Battery Gauge 70350OMlY 2 8 6 The Beeper ss aids a aie wd a A aa hw a 29 The Display i esac eta 24 o 08 eS pb sperte HD ES 2 9 1 Adjusting The Display Contrast 2 9 2 Panning The Display Contents 2 10 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only 210 1 Warnes src a ra Ha ass a eR 2 10 2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner 2 10 3 Scanning Techniques o o 2 11 Infrared IrDA Port 7035 Only o ooo 2 12 Low Temperature Freezer and Outdoor Terminals 2 12 1 Hand Held Terminals 2 12 2 Vehicle Mount Terminals 2 12 3 Important Operating Instructions 2 13 Maintenance ee ee ee Re Ree RD ee ee we 2 13 1 Cleaning All Terminals 2 13 2 7035 Special Instructions 2 13 3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 3 1 Keyboard Layouts 4264444864 e sews 3 1 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal Keyboards 3 1 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards ii Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents 3 2 Keyboard Keys A Description 0 004 48 3 2 1 The Status Area 7035 Only o 48 3 2
64. Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Network 1 12 Network AN Note This menu is not displayed if the 802 10 protocol is set to Y in the Radio sub menu or if a narrow band radio is installed in the terminal Network Range Local IP see text Net Mask see text Default Gateway see text Use DHCP N see text Use DNS N see text Ether Packet Sz 1500 1500 512 1024 1490 Mobile IP N see text 802 10 v2 see text Local IP This parameter is used to assign a unique terminal IP address so that the terminal can be identified on the network The format is HHH HHH HHH HHH Net Mask A subnet mask is assigned at this parameter The 7035 uses the subnet mask it s own IP address and the destination IP address to determine if a packet should be sent on the local network or a remote subnet If the destination is found to reside on the local network the packet is sent directly to its destination If the destination resides on a remote subnet the packet is routed to the appropriate gateway The accepted values for Net Mask range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 AN Note The terminal Net Mask must match the network controller net mask Default Gateway The Default Gateway IP address assigned at this parameter creates an identifiable communication link between the terminal and a remote sub network that is a network other than the one in which the terminal is cu
65. D 19 TRX7410 TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio 226 D 19 TRX7441 802 11b DS 225 TRX7441 802 11b DS SS D 8 WLAN 902 spread spectrum D 19 802 1Q statistics screen 87 802 10Qv2 statistics screen 89 802 11 SS statistics screen 86 802 11 statistics screen 85 Radio Addr Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio D 13 Radio Address D 6 D 13 D 14 D 19 narrow band radio D 14 WaveLAN 802 11 DSSS D 6 802 1Q vl D 6 902 spread spectrum D 19 radio address automatic 802 IQ v1 D 6 radio link aborts received ra TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 radio statistics screen 84 802 1Qv1 87 802 10v2 89 802 11 85 radio statistics screen resetting 90 Rate of key repeats 123 rb received beacons XVI Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 received acknowledgements 802 IQvl ra 88 802 IQv2 ra 88 received beacons rb 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 received bytes inbyte 85 received messages rm TRX7370 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 received packets inpkts 85 received packets w errors inerrs 85 received polls rp TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 received radio link aborts ra TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 Reg On Contact 187 Reg Retry Count 787 Reg RX Delay Mn 187 Reinit tmo 902 wireless LAN D 2 Renew Threshld 786 Replace mode 95 replace mode 171 Replay Protectn 788 replicator port picker cradle 2 6 reprinting a page 99 Reservation TRX7431 D 2 RESET Press Enter message 93 resetting default paramet
66. ESRD ERS eS 144 TO3A3 TATA ZOO o e et ek be a ee ew de e 145 Ll Applications 2 sk eat aa Tas kab ee RAE S RARA e 2 146 TAA ANSI Setting Sia 6 20 see ek we do we ww ee 147 TAAL HOSt COMM ute sio oes BU Eee aa ee 148 Veil SCCM 28554568 bee ESE E ES RE EES OS 151 FAAS Host Char Setos s seon eaa amp tok Ste ey he de 154 DAA Transmite o s oo gee ae ee RRS De ah ee es 155 RRIS Keyboard AE 156 TALLO Setial Vs atar rra Sy Ree dare 4 158 11 2 TESS Setngs gece ee ae oe ee RON See wT OS ee ee 159 TAZA Host Comte soi ea a dew a a ee eae e 160 108 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Tele2 2 SCIEN aaa Ce BALERS Ee Dew A 161 Th 2B Characters tek we hk we ake 163 ThA Seinal e 3 ete o oS Rs dl ea a 166 TADS TOSS eee ee ee Eee Re ew A a 168 TA ZO CAMEL 38 3 Beg ete od ae Gea E 2 oe ed eS we Gee 169 The Helds cerrar EE OE Se RR oY a 170 TSL2Z8 POAMTES i ne le aS BG amp a a we ee ee 172 78 View Manager vi x og 4 8 a oa a ORE a Se SS Rae a walk 173 7 9 GPS Global Positioning System Receiver o o 175 7 10 Ports Serial 1 And Console2 o o o ooo 176 7 10 1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options 176 7 10 2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings 177 7 11 Global Macros ss eere cba carnes rene 181 7 11 1 Displaying The Global MacrosMenu 181 7 11 2 Displaying The Global Macros Table 182 7 11 3 Ch
67. Europe e Conforms with Council Directive 89 336 EEC e Complies with standards EN 55022 class B and EN 50082 1 232 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 9 Specifications Peripheral Ports 9 4 Peripheral Ports Type External 28 pin PCR male connector Type 8255 8260 Only External 36 pin PCR male connector 9 4 1 Serial Port COM 1 Type Electrical Signal Lines Supported Modes Application Interface Transfer Rates Compatibility Protocols Limitations DTE 16550A equivalent with 16 byte data FIFO RS 232D signalling maximum cable length 50 ft typical 6 ft RTS CTS TxD RxD Standard UART with RTS CTS handshaking Via standard 16550 h w registers or BIOS serial device 2400 115 200 bps User assigned Application dependent For the 7035 only COM1 is shared with the IrDA port only one peripheral can be active at one time No hardware handshake support for DTR DSR DCD RI 9 4 2 Serial Port 2 COM 2 Type Electrical Signal Lines Supported Modes Application Interface Transfer Rates Compatibility Protocols Limitations DTE proprietary double buffered similar to 8251A RS 232D signalling maximum cable length 50 ft typical 6 ft TxD RxD Basic UART no hardware handshaking Only through BIOS serial device 1200 57 600 bps Decoded Scanners Scan See download cable GPS serves as the monitor port Application dependent No hardwar
68. F2 gt the PREVIOUS key or e Press the lt ESC gt key Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 119 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters System 1 5 System The parameters listed under the System menu allow you to customize terminal attributes such as volume contrast and font size System Range Volume 15 De 15 Contrast 0 34 49 Key Click Y see text One Shot Mode see text Typematic Rpt Y see text Caps Lock On N Y N Panning see text Backlight see text Font Size 18x20 see text Cursor Type Underlin Ss text Palette Remap see text Watchdog timer 0 0 30 Power see text Serial Number see text 1 5 1 Volume And Contrast Both the terminal beeper volume and the screen contrast can be adjusted using the lt BLUE gt key in combination with function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt However these changes are not saved to memory that is when the terminal is reset any volume and contrast adjustments are lost For information on manual beeper volume adjustments refer to Beeper Volume lt BLUE gt lt F3 gt And lt F4 gt on page 32 For details on manual contrast adjustments refer to Contrast Adjustment lt BLUE gt lt F1 gt And lt F2 gt on page 34 Adjustments made to the terminal beeper and the display using the Volume and Contrast parameters are saved to memory so that if the terminal is turned off or reset the adj
69. Ion batteries charging 205 description of 200 installing 16 maintaining 42 removing 15 safety precautions 43 200 Local Echo 157 Local Echo See Echo Mode 156 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XI Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Local IP 84 Location 190 LOCK B message 98 162 locked keyboard 172 LOCK H message 98 162 locking and unlocking keys 32 121 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 150 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 1 51 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 150 long range SE1200LR scanner 236 Lower ANSI Host Char Set 154 low profile keyboard 67 Lucent WaveLAN 802 11 PC card TRX7431 parameters radio D 1 specs 226 M MAC ADDR 802 1Qv2 88 Mac ADDR 802 1Qv1 88 MAC address 802 1Qv2 90 MAC address access point 802 1Qv1 87 Macro keys ABC keyboard accessing macro keys 76 AZERTY keyboard accessing macro keys 80 description of 35 programming See Global Macros 55 QWERTY keyboard accessing macro keys 70 36 key keyboard accessing macro keys 64 44 key keyboard accessing macro keys 58 56 key keyboard accessing macro keys 60 maintenance See terminal maintenance 42 Manual Table D 6 MapRF See SNMP Simple Network Man agement Protocol 189 match fields 94 Max Num Binds 788 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual memory resetting 1 7 messages error reply in TESS 165 LOCK B 98 162 LOCK H 98 162 onscreen indicat
70. No authentication WEP Encrypt Wired Equivalent Privacy This parameter encrypts radio traffic to protect it from electronic eavesdroppers To enable the encryption keys e Set the WEP Encrypt parameter to Y The WEP Encrypt sub menu provides four encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 The transmit key TX Key 1 is used to define which encryption key will be used to encrypt transmissions WEP Encrypt Key 1 12345 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Tx Key 1 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 11 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters Encryption Keys Key to Key 4 Encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 accept either ASCII or hex values Keep the following in mind when assigning encryption key values e Ifyou enter a hexadecimal value precede it with Ox e Ensure that you enter the same encryption key value on the terminal and on the Access Point with which the terminal will be communicating Allowable values are as follows e Key 1 5 13 ASCII digits or Ox followed by 10 26 hex digits The default is 12345 e Key 2 5 13 ASCII digits or Ox followed by 10 26 hex digits The default is e Key 3 5 13 ASCII digits or Ox followed by 10 26 hex digits The default is e Key 4 5 13 ASCII digits or Ox followed by 10 26 hex digits The default is TX Key This parameter allows you to speci
71. ORANGE Function Keys lt F7 gt To lt FI2 gt Function keys lt F7 gt to lt F12 gt are presented in orange print just above and to the left of the first six alpha keys on the keyboard Q W E R T and Y Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F7 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the lt Q gt key e To access lt F8 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt W gt and so on Accessing CTRL Function Keys lt FI3 gt To lt FI8 gt To access function keys lt F13 gt to lt F18 gt you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example e To access lt F13 gt press the lt CTRL gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F14 gt press lt CTRL gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing CTRL ORANGE Function Keys lt FI9 gt To lt F24 gt To access lt F19 gt to lt F24 gt you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key followed by the lt ORANGE gt key and then the appropriate alpha key Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 69 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing QWERTY Macro Keys For example e To access lt F19 gt press the lt CTRL gt key followed by the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the lt Q gt key e To access lt F20 gt press lt CTRL gt lt ORANGE gt lt W gt and so on Ac
72. TRX7431 D 2 Data Rate TRX7441 D 8 dead zone 238 DEC Cursor Keys ANSI Keyboard parameter 158 decode zones spread spectrum and narrow band 239 decoding bar codes advanced long range ALV 239 comparing entry string 132 decodes required 133 high performance HP 239 long range LR 239 narrow band 239 Security 133 Short Code 133 spread spectrum 239 2 D scanner 239 decrementing parameters 114 Default Gateway 184 Default Gateway Gateway IP address 184 DEFAULT key F4 113 DEFLT key F4 117 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal DEL CLR Key description of 50 in Local Echo mode ANSD 157 TESS sessions DEL key behaviour in 97 Delay between key repeats 122 DEL Key ANSI Keyboard parameter 157 Dev Attri 156 device attribute requests 703 DHCP using See Use DHCP 185 digit check digit 139 142 143 144 145 number system 141 142 Disable Beep TESS Keyboard parameter 172 disabling enabling Y N parameters 715 disconnecting ESC Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 149 Disp Ctrl 752 display Anchor View 173 Display ShiftDisplay Shift 174 Field scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 font sizes ANSI 152 font sizes System 127 font sizes TESS 162 moving 173 Normal scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 Origin scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 positioning 162 Scroll Mode 162 Use Increment 73 video attributes 153 154 171 X Increment 173 X origin 173 Y I
73. Tekterm application 2 5 1 Resetting The 7035 To reset the 7035 e Press and hold down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key for a minimum of six seconds A reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit When the terminal is reset it reboots to the Tekterm application 2 5 2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 To reset the 8255 or 8260 e Using the On Off switch turn the terminal off and back on again Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 25 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Working With The Startup Display Menu 2 6 Working With The Startup Display Menu AN Note If you re uncertain how to operate your terminal keyboard to access alpha characters function keys and so on refer to Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions beginning on page 45 2 6 1 The Display Menu 01 Display Menu A Parameters B Emulations DOS Prompt The start up Display Menu is used to access the Parameters menu the Tekterm application and the DOS prompt 2 6 1 1 Bypassing Tekterm At Terminal Bootup Normally the Tekterm application is launched automatically when the terminal is rebooted To bypass Tekterm and launch the Display Menu e As the terminal is rebooting press the lt ESC gt key If you re not quick enough with the lt ESC gt key and Tekterm is launched press lt ALT gt and type x to exit Tekterm and return to the Display Menu 2 6 1 2 Launchi
74. Telnet Settings 149 ESSID TRX7431 D 1 ESSID TRX7441 D 8 Ether Packet Sz 185 Exclusive 759 166 Exp to UPCA 141 External external scanner types 131 F failed battery charge 7942 205 failed battery charge 7967 207 faint video attribute 154 171 FASTPSP Fast Power Save Mode D 9 Fast Switch using Switch Speed parameter D 15 fault condition battery charging with 7942 205 fault condition battery charging with 7967 207 Fcursor mode 95 Features parameters for TESS Settings 172 field advance key function 94 field backspace key function 94 field exit key function 94 Field mode 95 Field Order 1 70 fields auto tab fields 94 bar code only fields 94 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual completing a data field 95 170 entry fields 93 field advance tab 94 field backspace 94 field exit 94 Field Order 1 70 Field scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 1 62 Field Size 137 fixed fields 93 hidden match 765 home 94 insert mode 171 match fields 94 replace mode 171 serial I O fields 94 size 137 tab field advance 94 transmit on 94 video attributes 753 154 171 visible match 165 Fields parameters for TESS Settings 170 fixed fields 93 FK Remap ANSI Telnet Settings 151 Flow Control 178 Font Override 174 fonts ANSI 152 System fonts 127 TESS 162 Font Size changing 127 152 162 Foreign Agents 188 form feed CTRL L 157 Full Ascii 735 Function keys ABC keyboard accessing function keys
75. UL approved 8 8 8 Attaching A Port Replicator A port replicator PN 21658 is an accessory which extends the 28 pin peripheral port connection for the 7035 terminal to an identical 28 pin fixed connector The port replicator mounts on the underside of any of the 7035 picker cradles with 2 screws A dsub9 COM port is also included It is equipped with transmit receive ground CTS and RTS signals When a port replicator is attached to a cradle you can for example attach a scanner to the 28 pin connector and a serial printer to the dsub9 connector 8 8 9 Picker Cradle Maintenance Picker cradles requires little maintenance e Ensure that the inside of the plastic cradle is clear of any debris e Avoid using strong solvents 216 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal 8 8 10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal The picker cradle is comprised of two parts a fixed outer metal chassis that is secured to the vehicle or work surface and a moveable plastic cradle in which the 7035 terminal is placed The plastic cradle tilts forward so that the terminal can be inserted or removed and it tilts back to lock the terminal EN GY W YN NW SNA NN Wow RAMAN ERA PWN EN S ay AR ANY WY Si ON WOO INS A Figure 8 3 Unpowered Picker Cradle 79374 To insert the 7035 in the plastic cradle e Us
76. When an 8 bit set is selected from the Lower character set the Upper character set cannot be changed To choose Lower and Upper character sets e Position the cursor on the Lower or Upper parameter and press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to display the character set options e Press lt F4 gt to save your selection to memory A Important When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed a rectangular box is used as a substitute 7 1 1 4 Transmit m Transmit Range _ Xmit Count 99 0 99 Xmit Wait 1 0 999 Dev Attr see text Auto Answer see text 7 Bit Y Y N Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the terminal before being transmitted to the host If 0 zero is selected the terminal transmits only according to the Xmit Wait parameter If the ANSI block mode features are used this parameter should be set to 99 AN Note Ifthe terminal is not in local edit mode the lt ENTER gt arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Count parameter setting Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the terminal collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second i e a value of 10 represents 1 second If 0 zero is selected th
77. X increment 5 1 40 Y increment 5 1 12 Display Shift Y Y N Custom Chars see text Font Override Y see text Anchor View When enabled set to Y this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved The X origin and Y origin coordinates specify where the screen origin the upper left corner of the screen will be fixed X origin And Y origin The X origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored The Y origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored Use increment When Use increment is enabled set to Y and the cursor is moved off the display the screen contents shift by the values specified in the X increment and Y increment parameters X increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Y increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view The value assigned here doesn t take effect until Use Increment is set to Y Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 173 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters View Manager Display Shift If this parameter is enabled s
78. alpha keys accessing 77 function keys accessing 77 macro keys accessing 80 B Backlight settings 7035 hand held 125 8255 amp 8260 LCD vehicle mounts 126 backspace CTRL H 157 bar code AIAG 169 appending to 134 137 139 comparing entry string with decoded bar code 132 connecting bar code reader 199 decodes required 133 decoding edge to edge 133 displaying type of bar code 134 12 of 3 decodes 133 parameters 135 145 prefix character 137 139 scanner port 199 Security 733 Short Code 133 stripping characters 137 139 suffix character 137 139 symbologies Codabar 142 Code 11 143 Code 128 138 Code 39 135 136 Code 93 142 D2o0f5 144 EAN 13 138 EAN 8 140 IATA 2 0f5 145 120f5 143 MSI Plessy 144 UPCA 14 UPCE 741 translating 132 bar code only fields 94 bar code reader external specs 235 external scanner operation of 799 integrated scanner operation of 35 internal or integrated specs 235 battery charger 203 212 fault charge indicator 7942 205 fault charge indicator 7967 207 mounting bracket 7942 203 safety instructions 7967 7978 amp 7942 211 212 7942 in unit charger 203 206 7942 specs 206 7967 gang charger 207 208 7967 specs 208 7978 gang charger 209 211 7978 specs 209 battery pack 200 203 a description of 200 bar graph indicating capacity 31 42 battery compatibility specific to picker cradle 2 9 battery specs 202 24 capacity of 31 42 charge time 205 206 cha
79. be on AN Note Ifthe 7035 is powered up when it is inserted in the charger it will be turned off automatically Battery Charged And Ready Typically a fast charge takes 3 5 to 4 hours When the Charge LED turns off and the green Ready LED turns on the fast charge cycle is complete and the terminal is ready for use 8 3 6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions The Fault LED remains on under one of the following circumstances e The charger cannot read valid data from the battery pack e The battery is not compatible with the 7942 charger e The battery pack is set to inhibit charge e The battery is defective cell damage e The battery temperature is outside the acceptable charge range 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F The Fault LED blinks when a charge process has failed Some possible causes are listed below e The battery temperature has gone outside of the acceptable charge range e The charger cannot communicate with the battery pack e The battery is defective e The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period When the terminal is removed from the charger the Fault LED should turn off If this LED remains on after the terminal is removed refer to Section 8 3 7 Charger Fault Conditions on page 206 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 205 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Charger Fault Conditions 8 3 7 Charger Fault C
80. cables installing 23 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal low profile keyboard 67 mounting cradle attaching terminal to 18 20 QWERTY keyboard 67 8260 ABC keyboard 73 antenna attaching 22 approvals 232 AZERTY keyboard 77 cables installing 22 display EL 232 LCD 232 extension power cables installing 23 mounting cradle attaching terminal to 21 QWERTY keyboard 67 9010t connection TESS 160 902 spread spectrum radio parameters D 19 D 22 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XXV
81. dot is available on the installed scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time on page 134 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or two seconds have elapsed For terminals using external scanners the warning message can be turned off by setting the Scan Indic parameter to N Refer to Scan Indic 7035 Only on page 134 for details 7035 terminals with internal scanners always display this warning indicator even if the Scan Indic parameter is set to N o Figure 2 6 7035 Scanner Warning Indication Successful Decode If the scanner has successfully read the bar code The terminal beeps The warning indicator disappears Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following Is the terminal on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the terminal you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code 36 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Scanning Techniques e Check the bar c
82. ed wee amp a a Boe Oe y Se 94 5 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 95 5 5 2 lt CLR gt Key BehaviourInTESS 0 96 5 5 3 lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS oe ceco ee caa a o 97 0 Lock Messages e ewig gue a aaa A 98 5 7 Control Commands c os ec eoa hee ee ee 99 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual 91 Chapter 5 TESS Operations Configuration TESS Teklogix Screen Subsystem is the normal operating mode of Teklogix terminals Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Teklogix Software Development Kit SDK installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands The 9140 Wireless Gateway and the 9150 Access Point are also equipped with protocol emulation software AN Note If the message RESET Press Enter flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the terminal press the lt ENTER gt key once 5 1 Configuration AN Note Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it Refer to Applications on page 146 for more details The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled Applications on page 146 A unique terminal number must be assigned in the Terminal parameter for each TESS session Refer to Terminal in the section titled TESS Settings on page 159 for details 5 2 Working With Multiple Sessions When Tek
83. function The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear Manual Panning Keys Arrow Keys If the contents of a screen are too large to fit in the margins of the terminal window they can be panned or shifted to display the information that is outside the margins The 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals allow both manual and automatic panning The Panning parameter specifies when and how the screen contents should be shifted gn Note For details about Auto Panning refer to Auto Pan Left Margin Right Margin And Bottom Margin on page 124 Manual panning shifting the contents of the screen using the lt BLUE gt key in combination with the lt LEFT gt lt RIGHT gt lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys relies on the values set in the X Increment and Y Increment parameters to determine the number of columns spaces and rows lines to pan or shift To access the X Increment and Y Increment parameters e Inthe Parameters menu position the cursor on the System option and press lt Fl gt e Move the cursor down to Panning and press lt F1 gt Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 49 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions The Standard Keys Important Onl
84. gt Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt are directly accessible by pressing the appropriate function key in the top row on the keyboard a key combination is not required to access these keys For example e To access function key lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on through to lt F4 gt Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 59 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing Macro Keys Accessing BLUE Function Keys lt F5 gt To lt F30 gt Function keys lt F5 gt to lt F30 gt appear on the terminal plastic in blue print above and to the right of alpha keys lt A gt to lt Z gt To access a function key you need to press the lt BLUE gt key before pressing an alpha key For example to access function key lt F5 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by alpha key lt A gt To access function key lt F6 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt B gt and so on 3 4 3 Accessing Macro Keys 56 key 7035 terminals offer 10 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M10 gt These keys are located in the bottom two rows of the keyboard They appear in orange print above and to the left of alpha keys lt Q gt through lt Z gt Accessing lt MI gt To lt MI0 gt To access lt M1 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt Q gt To access lt M2 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt R gt and so on t
85. if Password Echo is set to Y otherwise skip to step 7 Terminal looks for Login Failed in next transmission from host Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1 Login Prompt When the terminal receives the string assigned to this parameter it will respond with Login Login The terminal responds with this string when it receives a Login Prompt Password Prompt When the terminal receives this string it responds with a Password Password The terminal responds with this string when it receives a Password Prompt 150 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Screen Password Echo When this parameter is set to Y the host will echo data back to the terminal after receiving a Password Login Failed When the terminal receives this string it assumes that the login attempt has failed and returns to the Enter Pmpt FK Remap Setting this parameter to Y allows the terminal to redefine the character sequence sent by ANSI function keys When FK Remap is set to Y the ANSI FK Remap menu becomes available in the root Parameters menu Refer to ANSI FK Remap on page 195 for additional details 7 7 1 2 Screen Screen Range Pages 4 0 16 Columns 80 80 or 132 Rows 24 4 60 Auto Wrap Y Y N Disp Ctrls N Y N Font Size 18x20 see text Cursor Typ Underlin Underline Block So
86. indicating you must first press the lt ORANGE gt or the lt BLUE gt key before accessing a colour coded function or character As an example on a hand held terminal to access the CLR function which is printed in blue characters above the lt DEL gt key e Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press the lt DEL gt key AN Important KEEP IN MIND that you can change the key lock function of the lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys using the One Shot Mode parameter see One Shot Mode on page 121 48 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions The Standard Keys 3 2 3 The Standard Keys The lt SHIFT gt Key The lt SHIFT gt key is used to display uppercase letters and on 7035 s it is also used to access the punctuation marks displayed on the numeric keys When this key is pressed it is only active until the next alphanumeric key is pressed For example once you press lt SHIFT gt and type the letter q the letter is displayed in uppercase and the shift function turns off To display all alpha characters in uppercase lock the lt SHIFT gt key on by pressing it twice To unlock the lt SHIFT gt key press it a third time For more details about the lock function refer to Key Lock Function on page 52 AN Note On vehicle mounts without a dedicated lt SHIFT gt key the lt ORANGE gt key is used to access the lt SHIFT gt
87. information describing the radio installed in your terminal D 3 TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters TRX7370 rm Range Cellular Y see text Channel see text Poll Timing see text Power Saving N see text CIS Data AN Important Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key for a minimum of six seconds D 3 1 Cellular Cellular Range Auto Radio Addr N Y N Radio Address 0 0 3840 Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is set to Y the terminal requests an automatically assigned radio address AN Note If Auto Radio Addr is enabled set to Y any value assigned to the Radio Address parameter is ignored Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 13 Appendix D Radio Parameters Channel Radio Address AN Important Radio Address only takes effect when Cellular is enabled set to Y The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal D 3 2 Channel Channel Range Channel il 1 20 Power up chan Y Y N Channel Enable see text Switch speed Slow Fast Slow Manual table N see text
88. minimum of six seconds 7 3 8 2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 To reset an 8255 or 8260 e Using the On Off switch turn the terminal off and back on again 1 3 9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values AN Important When lt F3 gt the DEFAULT key is pressed all parameter values revert to the factory defaults including those values that you ve changed and saved e Press lt F3 gt the DEFAULT function key to reinstate the default parameter values e Press lt F4 gt the SAVE function key to save the changes e Reset the terminal See Resetting The Terminal above Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 117 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Terminal Parameters 1 4 Terminal Parameters e Warning Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties Generally parameters are configured for each site during installation The Parameters menus can only be accessed by individuals with the proper security password Security is divided into two levels Supervisory and Psion Teklogix Personnel passwords Refer to Security on page 194 for details about changing the default supervisory level password Refer to Allow Teklogix on page 194 for details about the Psion Teklogix support level password A N Important Only individuals with a supervisory
89. occurrence Wiping the condensation from these windows may help but the operator may need to wait until the condensation stops forming before use e To reduce condensation and frost on terminal displays use an anti fogging agent once a week or as required e Contact lubricant and connector caps must be used on all external connec tors to maintain a moisture barrier and prevent corrosion during freezer and outdoor use For 7035 terminals the contact lubricant PN 93523 Dow Corning 111 must be used On all versions of 8255 8260 vehicle mount terminals the contact lubricant PN 95146 Nyogel must be used Further the appropriate contact lubricant should be replaced at least monthly in applications requiring daily or frequent removal of cables Refer to the table below for connector cap part numbers Terminal Type Connector Cap Part No 7035 8255 amp 8260 28 pin Honda 94989 20 pin Honda 94988 2 12 3 2 For Hand Held Terminals Only e Do not charge batteries in a freezer environment e Ifa hand held terminal is left in a freezer environment for extended periods of time with the power off display response time and contrast are severely affected After turning the terminal on the operator should allow a 15 minute warm up period outside the freezer before use e Battery capacity is reduced as the operating temperature cools based on the application and the type of radio used The table below generally outli
90. of 500 charge cycles Fast charge typically in 3 5 to 4 hours Identifies the need for pack replacement 7 4 V nominal 6 0 V to 8 4 V maximum for battery pack PN 20605 003 2200 mAh at 7 4 V nominal for battery pack PN 20605 003 135 g nominal 9 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7370 radio 15 hours at 23 C 73 4 F with TRX7431 radio with backlight on 5 5 scan transactions per minute TESS emulation 20605 003 battery pack Based on typical 1 year cell degradation Other radios will differ Model 7967 6 gang custom charger Model 7942 In unit charger Model 7978 3 gang custom charger No memory effect Indicates remaining capacity 0 to 100 resolution 10 Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference Operator is notified when battery capacity is low Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 241 APPENDIX SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES A Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers worldwide These services include post installation technical support and product repairs A 1 1 Canada and USA Technical Support and Repair Services In Canada and the U S A these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix Helpdesk The Helpdesk coordinates repairs helps you troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site Canadian and U S
91. of decoded bar code e Compare with the end of decoded bar code x Compare with the entire decoded bar code a Compare anywhere within the decoded bar code default If the first character is none of b e x or a the character is assumed to be an a and is stripped from the rest of the In entry AN Note Translation of the decoded bar code occurs after all other modifications to the bar code have been done e g prefix char suffix char strip etc Out n If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding In string the decoded bar code will be translated into the Out string This string entry parameter can be null or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters e g function keys lt ENTER gt etc 132 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Other Options 1 6 2 2 Other Options Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted The allowable range is 0 to 15 Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge bar codes Code 93 Code 128 UPC EAN The allowable value is 0 to 99 Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the b
92. orange message indicates that the lt ORANGE gt key will be orange active only until the next key is pressed The alpha characters printed in orange typeface on the terminal plastic become available Panay This horizontal gauge indicates the charge level of the battery Gauge A lowercase link message indicates that a radio link has been established but link the link is currently in power down mode a mode that lowers the consump Narrowband tion of battery power Note that the absence of a link message either upper case or lowercase indicates that a radio link has not been established LINK Uppercase LINK This indicates that the radio link is operational Note that the absence of a link indicator message either uppercase or lowercase indi Narrowband cates that a radio link has not been established Uppercase LINK The terminal is receiving 802 IQ beacons from an 802 1Q LINK base station at regular intervals This indicates that the terminal is within communicating range of the base station 802 1Q Blank If a LINK onscreen message does not appear the radio is not within communicating range of a configured and operating base station Table 2 1 7035 Onscreen Indicators Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Softkeys 2 8 4 Softkeys Softkeys are function keys that are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed Softkey labels are displayed on the terminal scre
93. periodic basis and compares it to the value assigned as the low channel quality threshold CQ Thresh If the channel quality is lower than this threshold a trap is sent only once until the channel quality increases to a recovery level This parameter is set to 0 zero by default 1 14 Radio Refer to Appendix D Radio Parameters for a detailed description of the parameters used to adjust radio communications 7 15 Sound AN Note The default values for Beep tone Error tone and Scan tonel 2 and 3 vary between 7035 hand helds and vehicle mount terminals 7 15 1 Vehicle Mount Sound Parameter Values Sound Range Beep tone 2300 500 5000 Beep time 600 0 2000 Error tone 800 500 5000 Error time 600 0 2000 Scan tone 1250 500 5000 Scan time 150 0 2000 Scan tone 2 2300 500 5000 Scan time 2 150 0 2000 Scan tone 3 3750 500 5000 Scan time 3 150 0 2000 192 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters 7035 Hand Held Sound Parameter Values 7 15 2 7035 Hand Held Sound Parameter Values sound Range Beep tone 4300 500 5000 Beep time 600 0 2000 Error tone 3000 500 5000 Error time 600 0 2000 Scan tone 1 2600 500 5000 Scan time 1 150 0 2000 Scan tone 2 3300 500 5000 Scan time 2 150 0 2000 Scan tone 3 4750 500 5000 Scan time 3 150 0 2000 Beep Tone And B
94. set to Y the attached sub menu of parameters is enabled 802 10 vl Range Auto Radio Addr Y Y N Radio Address 0 1 3840 Initial RTT 0 0 1000 Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is enabled set to Y a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the terminal radio If Auto Radio Addr is set to N the value entered in the Radio Address parameter is used Refer to Radio Address in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses AN Important Ensure that all terminals grouped in the system use the same addressing process that is if you choose to use automatic radio addressing use this addressing process for all terminals operating in the same system If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the Radio Address parameter use this process for all terminals in the same system Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal D 6 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios Initial RIT Round Trip Time Round trip time is the elapsed time between a terminal transmission and an access point acknowledgement Each terminal continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time cal
95. the contrast suits your needs To work more efficiently with these keys refer to the note on page 34 To lighten the display AN Note 2 9 1 2 Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press lt F2 gt Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs To work more efficiently with these keys refer to the note below To more efficiently adjust the display contrast lock the lt BLUE gt key on by pressing it twice You can then press the lt F1 gt and lt F2 gt function keys until you can easily read the contents of the terminal screen When you have satisfactorily adjusted the contrast press the lt BLUE gt key a third time to unlock or turn it off Contrast Adjustment Using The Contrast Parameter To access the Contrast parameter In the Parameters menu position the cursor on the System option and press lt Fl gt Position the cursor on the Contrast parameter and enter a value from 10 to 10 The greater the value assigned the darker the screen contrast that is entering a value of 10 results in a very dark screen 34 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Panning The Display Contents 2 9 2 Panning The Display Contents 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals support autopanning as a default mode The screen will pan as necessary to ensure the current cursor position is always visible AN Note Refer to Auto Pan L
96. threshold the terminal uses to determine when commu nication quality with a base station is unacceptable When this threshold is exceeded the terminal starts channel searching for a new base station Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the terminal is more tol erant of poor communication quality When the communication quality of the termi nal radio drops below 46 the terminal monitors the channel quality for 15 time out periods before searching for a new channel If Switch speed is set to Fast the current channel is monitored for only up to 2 time out periods before channel switching begins AN Important Fast Switch is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping If the coverage areas barely overlap have dead spots or if the terminal frequently operates on the fringe of coverage this parameter should be set to Slow Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 15 Appendix D Radio Parameters Channel Manual Table r Manual Table CH 1 list o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o e o CH 20 list 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 This parameter can be used to set the channel search order the terminal will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required If this parameter is left at the default setting of N the terminal uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality If
97. to configure your system access ID E 2 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client Launching And Setting Up AirFortress Secure Client E 3 Launching And Setting Up AirFortress Secure Client To launch AirFortress e Type fscfg A menu of options is displayed 1 Change password 2 Change access ID 3 Toggle encryption 4 Reset connections 5 Diagnostics 6 Quit E 3 1 Assigning A Password The password for AirFortress is set to sysadm by default It is important that you assign your own password one that you can easily remember but that is not obvious to anyone else Write your password on a piece of paper and keep it in a secure place e Choose Change Password from the startup menu e Inthe New Password field type your new password press lt ENTER gt e Inthe Confirm Password field type your password again A message indicates that the change was successful e Press the M key to return to the menu E 3 2 Changing Device Access ID The same access ID must be assigned to every device communicating on the network This ID is a 16 digit hexadecimal value that identifies and either allows or denies access to a particular device 7035 terminals with the AirFortress driver installed can only communicate with AirFortress Gateways AF1100 that have the same access ID To change the access ID e Choose Change Access ID from the startup menu
98. to save the changes lt F3 gt lt F4 gt SAVE Saves the current set of parameter values Table 7 1 Softkeys In The Parameter Manager Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 113 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Displaying Sub Menus 1 3 2 Displaying Sub Menus The gt character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub menu Displaying Sub Menus To display a sub menu e Use the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub menu you want to display e Press lt F1 gt the NEXT menu function key Returning To The Previous Menu e Press lt F2 gt the PREV function key or e Press lt ESC gt 1 3 3 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video To increment or decrement a number e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow keys or e Type the desired number in the field Negative values are entered by typing a minus sign and then the number e Press lt ENTER gt Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example a preset range of 1 through 10 If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1 the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter if any will be displayed 114 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Y N Parame
99. to values equivalent to those used by 7030 8055 8060 generation terminals 1 9 GPS Global Positioning System Receiver AN Important GPS is only available for 7035 WAN hand helds terminals equipped with Wide Area Network radios The parameters in the GPS menu are used to configure the GPS receiver The receiver can be programmed to transmit one or more NMEA sentences to the terminal once every Tx period seconds A amp L Note The terminal will transmit sentences from the GPS without modifications For more information on the exact formats of the GPS sentences review the documentation included with your GPS receiver GPS Range GGA Y Y N GLL N Y N RMC N Y N VTG N Y N Tx Period 10 1 255 GGA When GGA is enabled set to Y a Global Positioning System Fix Data message can be transmitted from the GPS receiver The data available in a GGA message includes Time Latitude Longitude Altitude Signal Quality Number of Satellites and Horizontal Dilution of Precision GLL Setting this parameter to Y allows a Geographic position Latitude and Longitude sentence to be transmitted from the GPS receiver The data available in a GLL message includes Time Latitude Longitude Status and Mode RMC Setting RMC to Y allows a Recommended minimum specific GPS Transmit data sentence to be transmitted from the GPS receiver The data available in a RMC message includ
100. when a cellular acknowledgement is not received for a previously sent message This parameter operates in units of seconds and is set to 10 by default D 4 3 Power Saving Power Saving Range PwrON time 0 0 20 PwrOFF time 0 0 20 PwrON xmit 0 1 20 PwrON time This parameter is used in conjunction with PwrOFF time to control the duration of time the radio stays on after a message is sent twice this period if application data is sent PwrON time is in units of 1 2 seconds The range is 0 to 20 and increases the radio on time in increments of 0 5 seconds PwrON time should be set from 8 to 20 for 902 MHz radios AN Important Using power saving in Wireless LAN will affect system perfor mance since terminals cannot receive routing information when the radio is turned off and will thus be slower to hop to new routes Therefore the PwrON time parameter should not be set lower than 5 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 21 Appendix D Radio Parameters CIS Data PwrOFF time This parameter is used in conjunction with PwrON time to reduce the power consumption of the radio The terminal turns off for this period of time and following the power off time turns on for a very short period of time to determine if the terminal is still on line If the terminal is on line it is turned off for the PwrOFF time If the terminal is off line it is re initial
101. y origin 173 ANSI Applications menu 146 Auto Answer 156 Auto Login Telnet Settings 750 Auto Term 147 Group 147 160 Auto Wrap 152 Columns 52 configuration 103 Conn Type connection type 48 CR character 158 DevAttr 156 device attribute requests 03 Disp Ctrl 752 Echo Mode 156 ENTER key 157 ENTER Pmpt Telnet Settings 149 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual l Index Il Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal ESC Prompt Telnet Settings 149 Exclusive 759 FK Remap Telnet Settings 5 Function key equivalents 104 Group Auto Term 147 160 Host Telnet Settings 49 LF character 158 Login Telnet Settings 50 Login Failed Telnet Settings 5 Login Prompt Telnet Settings 150 multiple sessions 146 Newline 58 Pages 151 Password Telnet Settings 150 Password Echo Telnet Settings 151 Password Prompt Telnet Settings 150 Port 1 49 Rows 1 52 sessions closing 106 sessions establishing new 1705 sessions listing 705 sessions moving between 1705 settings 147 157 Telnet connection 148 Terminal 148 transmitting data 137 139 7 Bit 156 802 IQ connection 148 ANSI FK Remap 195 ANSI Settings Async In Serial 758 character sets choosing 154 Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 148 keyboard settings 156 Screen settings 151 Start and End Serial 759 transmission strings settings 155 Transmit parameters 1 55 antenna installing on 8255 or 8260 22 ins
102. 02 1Qv2 Radio Statistics Screen 89 4 5 Resetting Radio Statistics w o me cate acio o o ee 90 4 6 Exiting TekterT 4 3244 44 Dace a abs aaa a 90 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 81 Chapter 4 Tekterm Introduction 4 1 Introduction Tekterm is a Teklogix DOS application resident on the 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals It provides real time terminal emulations that are compatible with Teklogix RF DC systems The Tekterm application allows the terminal operator to run up to four TESS and or ANSI sessions This application accepts input from the terminal keyboard or from a serial device such as a scanner and provides output to a serial device such as a printer 4 2 Launching Tekterm A amp L Note Normally the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on If Tekterm is not already running on your terminal you can launch it from the start up Display Menu m 01 Display Menu J A Parameters B Emulations G DOS Prompt Tekterm is launched through the Emulations menu To launch Tekterm e Type the letter b Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 83 Chapter 4 Tekterm Working With Application Session Windows 4 3 Working With Application Session Windows The window area in Tekterm contains the active application It is possible to have one or more application sessions usually TESS or AN
103. 10 keyboards offer 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt They are displayed in blue print above and to the right of alpha keys lt A gt through lt J gt the first row of alpha keys and lt K gt through lt L gt in the second row of alpha keys You need to press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key to access a macro key For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt A gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt BLUE gt lt B gt and so on 3 1 3 2 FI To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access Macro keys on F To F6 keyboards are displayed in orange print above and to the left of alpha keys lt K gt through lt P gt and lt T gt through lt Y gt You need to press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key to access a macro key For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt K gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt ORANGE gt lt L gt and so on 76 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions AZERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards 3 8 AZERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards 3 8 1 Accessing Alpha Keys The alpha keys on vehicle mount AZERTY keyboards are directly accessible a key combination is not required For example to type the letter A e Press the lt A gt key To type the letter Z e Press the lt Z gt key and so on Creating Uppercase Letters
104. 11 DS D 2 Q QWERTY keyboard 8255 amp 8260 67 alpha keys accessing 67 function keys accessing 67 macro keys accessing 70 R ra received acknowledgements 802 1Qv1 88 802 IQv2 88 ra received radio link aborts TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 radio AP Density TRX7431 D 2 Auth Type D 0 Auto Radio Addr narrow band radio D 13 Cellular narrow band radio D 13 cellular mode D 22 Channel 802 11 DS radio D 3 D 10 CIS Data Card Information Structure D 13 D 18 D 22 CIS Data Card Information Structure TRX7431 D 7 Data Rate TRX7431 D 2 Data Rate TRX7441 D 8 ESSID TRX7431 D 1 ESSID TRX7441 D 8 Initial RTT WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS D 7 MAC address 88 Mixed Cells D 0 Network Adhoc or Infra D 3 D 10 parameters D 1 D 22 power saving parameters D 2 D 22 Pwr Saving 802 11b DS D 9 Pwr Saving 802 11 DS D 2 Radio Address narrow band radio D 14 Radio Address WaveLAN 802 11 DS SS D 6 Radio Address 902 spread spectrum D 19 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XV Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Reservation TRX7431 D 2 resetting statistics 90 spread spectrum 902 D 19 Station TRX7431 D 2 Station TRX7441 D 8 Statistics resetting 90 statistics screen narrow band 86 resetting 90 viewing 4 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Q0v2 89 802 11 85 802 11 SS 86 TRX7370 narrow band 225 TRX7370 statistics screen 86 TRX7410A TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio 226
105. 16 to 128 MB of additional mass storage that appears as an additional drive Note This slot is not available if the terminal is operating with a TRX7370 narrowband or a TRX7410 TekLan 902 spread spectrum radio e RS 232 peripheral port supports decoded and non decoded scanners serial printers and COM devices e Macro keys to program special characters keys and or frequently used key strokes 6 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction The 7035 Hand Held Terminal 1 3 2 The 7035 Hand Held Terminal M7 TTXLOGIX Y TELDE e 0 0 an esc cs ap D lt p osa 0000 Bo Figure 1 1 The 7035 Hand Held 36 Key And 44 Key Keyboards Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction The 7035 Hand Held Terminal Figure 1 2 7035 1 With Optional Pistol Grip Handle 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction The 7035 Hand Held Terminal Figure 1 4 Infrared IrDA Port Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction The 7035 Hand Held Terminal LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM MAX OUTE ASS This product contains XXXXXX 2 4 GHz Radio XXXXX XXX XX CANADA XXX XXX XXX PN XXX XXXXXX XX FCC ID XXXXXX XX Thi h inte a u
106. 2 lt ORANGE gt And lt BLUE gt Keys 48 3 2 3 The Standard KeyS o o 49 3 2 4 Key Lock Function s 024 642 sd eps pea 52 3 2 5 The Function Keys ssas o o o 54 32 6 The Macro Keys ints as ace ah wuts W a ear a ae 55 3 3 44 Key 7035 Keyboards o o e e 57 3 3 1 Accessing Alpha Characters o o 57 3 3 2 Accessing Function KeyS o s cs s se corea bs o 57 3 3 3 Accessing Macro Keys o o o 58 3 4 56 Key 7035 Keyboards lt ocer o o 59 3 4 1 Accessing Alpha Characters o 59 3 42 Accessing Function KeyS o o 59 3 43 Accessing Macro Keys o o o o o 60 3 5 36 Key 7035 Keyboards lt gt o lt o o o e 61 3 5 1 Accessing Alpha Characters 61 3 5 2 Accessing Function KeyS o o 63 3 5 3 Accessing The Macro KeyS o o 64 3 6 QWERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards o o o o 67 3 6 1 Accessing Alpha KeyS o o o 67 3 6 2 Accessing QWERTY Function Keys 67 3 6 3 Accessing QWERTY Macro Keys 70 3 7 ABC 8255 8260 Keyboards o o 73 3 7 1 Accessing Alpha KeyS gt cacca crc o ooo 73 3 7 2 Accessing ABC Function KeyS 73 3 7 3 Accessing ABC Macro Keys 76 3 8 AZERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards o
107. 217 D9 HEX 25611611 11011010 218 DA 1101 1011 219 DB 11011100 220 DC 1101 1101 221 DD 11011110 222 DE 1101 1111 223 DF 11100000 224 E0 1110 0001 225 B El 11100010 226 E2 1110 0011 227 E3 11100100 228 E4 1110 0101 229 ES 11100110 230 Y E6 1110 0111 231 E7 11101000 232 E8 1110 1001 233 E9 11101010 234 EA 1110 1011 235 EB 11101100 236 EC 1110 1101 237 ED 11101110 238 EE 1110 1111 239 EF 11110000 240 FO 1111 0001 241 F1 11110010 242 F2 1111 0011 243 F3 11110100 244 F4 1111 0101 245 FS 11110110 246 F6 1111 0111 247 F7 1111 1000 248 F8 1111 1001 249 F9 1111 1010 250 FA 1111 1011 251 FB 1111 1100 252 FC 1111 1101 253 FD 11111110 254 FE 1111 1111 255 FF C 4 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX RADIO PARAMETERS Important Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system D I TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios 802 11 DS SS Range ESSID TEKLOGIX see text Station see text AP Density Low see text Data Rate Auto see text Reservation 2347 0 2347 Pwr Saving Y see text Network Infra Infra Adhoc Channel gl 1 14 WEP Encrypt N see text 802 1X Y see text 802 IQ v1 N see text CIS Data See text AN Important Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressin
108. 26 8x8 3 04 18x20 8x 14 8x 16 5 32 10x20 6 08 9x20 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 229 Chapter 9 Specifications 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications Approvals Safety applies to chargers UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No950 LVD EN 60950 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A EMC Directive Class B Laser CDRH IEC Class II 9 3 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications 8255 Physical Size And Weight Enclosure 16 gauge steel 1 5 mm 0 060 with baked enamel finish Size 287 mm 11 3 W x 102 mm 4 0 D x 229 mm 9 0 H Weight 3 8 kg 8 4 lbs 8260 Display Physical Size And Weight Enclosure 16 gauge steel 1 5 mm 0 060 with baked enamel finish Size 287 mm 11 3 W x 64 mm 2 5 D x 229 mm 9 0 H Weight 3 4 kg 7 5 lbs 8260 Keyboard Physical Size And Weight Enclosure 16 gauge steel 1 5 mm 0 060 with baked enamel finish Size 287 mm 11 3 W x 64 mm 2 5 D x 229 mm 9 0 H Weight 1 1 kg 2 4 lbs 8255 VFD Standard Temp Environmental AN Note For 8255 VFD low temp and freezer terminal operating temperatures and instructions refer to 8255 8260 Freezer Terminals on page 38 and 8255 8260 Low Temp Terminals on page 39 Operating temperature 10 to 60 C 14 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative Humidity 10 to 95 RH non condensing Shock 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse 11 ms d
109. 260 LCD vehicle mounts Suitable for use in temperatures ranging from 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F VED and EL vehicle mounts Suitable for use in temperatures ranging from 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Designed for use in outdoor vehicle cab applications Water sealed to withstand rain Input power 8255 8260 12 VDC 2 12 3 Important Operating Instructions g Warning IT IS CRITICAL that this information be reviewed and that any guidelines applicable to your terminal be strictly followed 2 12 3 1 For All Freezer Terminals Use terminals only in the environments for which they are designed DO NOT open the terminal casing and attempt to perform repairs Only Teklogix technicians are qualified to open and repair your terminal All Teklogix freezer vehicle mount terminals have built in heaters where required to warm internal components To help maintain the temperature terminals should be switched on before entry into a freezer environment and should be left on at all times while in a freezer environment Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 39 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation For Hand Held Terminals Only e Hand held LCD terminals used in freezers may require some contrast adjustment if the display darkens due to a rapid drop in temperature e When moving between freezer and warm humid environments window condensation or icing on the outside of the display and scanner window is a normal
110. 4 costados ee wea dare ee as 234 9 7 Wireless Communication Options 20 0200 08 4 234 9 8 GPS Units e 24 9 2 aa a add 234 9 9 Bar Code SEAMOS o a ard ewe a SAAS ork ewe 4 235 9 9 1 Internal Scanners 7035 Only o o o ooo o 235 9 9 2 External Scammers 4 2 402 eda 4 Bee ho le Se de ba 235 9 9 3 Internal Scanner Port 7035 Only o oo 235 9 10 Internal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only 0 236 9 11 Power Management 7035 OdlY o oo 240 9 11 1 Power Saye States i eii a io 240 9 12 Lithium Ion Battery Pack 7035 OnlY o 241 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 223 Chapter 9 Specifications Radio Specifications A amp L Note Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice 9 1 Radio Specifications Important Sites in Canada using Teklogix TRX7431 and TRX7441 802 11 b radios require a radio licence unless they are installed totally within a building user must obtain licence from Industry Canada TRX7370 Narrow Band Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates 0 5 1 0 2 0 Watts 403 512 MHz 20 4800 9600 19 2 kbps TRX7441 802 1 1b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Transmit Power Frequency Range 1 5 20 30 50 100mW 2 4 GHz 2 5 GHz Channels 11 FCC 13 ET 14 JP 2 SP 4 FR Data Rates 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Refer to Regulatory Information
111. 5 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Turning The Terminals On And Off A 2 4 Turning The Terminals On And Off Important Any differences in operation between the 7035 hand held and the 8255 8260 vehicle mount terminals are explicitly indicated The Teklogix 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals are fully functional personal computers PCs compatible with the IBM AT 486 architecture They normally come pre loaded with DOS These terminals are intended to be used in terminal emulation mode for real time wireless data transaction processing However they can also be used stand alone in batch mode The remainder of this manual describes terminal operation as it applies to normal terminal emulation mode utilizing wireless communication to a host computer The operation of these terminals depends on the application software running on the host computer The terminals interaction with the application depends on both the terminal operating system and the terminal hardware This chapter outlines the unique features of the hardware For more information on the terminal operating system see Chapter 7 Setting Parameters 2 4 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal Turning On The 7035 The 7035 does not have a dedicated On Off button To turn the 7035 on e Press and hold down the lt ENTER ON gt key for at least one second Turning Off The 7035 Important Turning the 7035 off does not result in a complete r
112. 5 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual xix Approvals And Safety Summary Declaration Of Conformity Product 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Conformity Declared EN 55022 1998 Class B ETS 300 826 1997 to Standards EN 50082 1 1997 EN 55024 1998 ETS 300 683 1997 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 1kV on AC line EN 61000 4 5 AC line 2kV Common 1kV Diff mode EN 61000 4 6 3VRMS 150kHz 80MHz AC line EN 61000 4 11 AC Mains Ports ISO 7637 1 1990 ISO 7637 2 1990 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 A11 Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Blvd Mississauga Ontario Canada LSN 7J9 Year of Manufacture 1999 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in European Community La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Data Collecting Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario January 15 2003 Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S A France January 15 2003 XX Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Approvals And Sa
113. 56 key Page 59 e 36 key Page 61 3 1 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards Vehicle mount terminals are available in three different alphabetic layouts QWERTY ABC and AZERTY In addition all these keyboard layouts are available in two keyboard types Fl to F6 and Fl to F10 The F1 To F6 keyboard type is equipped with 6 yellow function keys that are directly accessible along the top row of the keyboard The F To F10 keyboard type is equipped with 0 yellow function keys across the top of the keyboard Depending on which keyboard type you are using accessing the extended function keys and the macro keys along with the lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt and lt SHIFT gt keys differ slightly These differences are clearly outlined in each keyboard section Important Make certain that the appropriate keyboard type F1 to F6 or F1 to F10 is selected in the Keyboard Type parameter see Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only on page 130 The vehicle mount keyboards are described in the following sections e QWERTY Page 67 e ABC Page 73 e AZERTY Page 77 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 47 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Keyboard Keys A Description 3 2 Keyboard Keys A Description AN Note Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted The 7035 8255 and 8260 termi
114. 57 3 3 1 Accessing Alpha Characters o o ooo o 57 3 3 2 Accessing Function Keys o o o e eee 57 3 3 3 Accessing Macro KeyS o o e a a eee 58 3 4 56 Key 7035 Keyboards o o enes e et 59 3 4 1 Accessing Alpha Characters o o e 59 3 4 2 Accessing Function Keys 0 o e ee eee 59 3 4 3 Accessing Macro Keys o o e eee ee 60 3 5 36 Key 703 Keyboards 20 oia a a a 61 3 5 1 Accessing Alpha Characters o o ooo e 61 3 5 2 Accessing Function Keys o o o e eee 63 3 5 3 Accessing The Macro Keys o o o o 64 3 6 QWERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards o o o o o o 67 3 6 1 Accessing Alpha Keys 2 2 2 2 0 0 0002 eee eee 67 3 6 2 Accessing QWERTY Function Keys o 67 3 6 2 1 F1 To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access 68 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 45 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 3 6 2 2 F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access 69 3 6 3 Accessing QWERTY Macro KeyS o o 70 3 6 3 1 F1 To F10 Keyboard Macro Key Access 70 3 6 3 2 Fl To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access 71 3 7 ABC 8255 8260 Keyboards sde t sa saa a e eg ee 73 3 7 1 Accessing Alpha Keys 2 2 2 0 000000 000200 73 3 7 2 Accessing ABC Function KeyS o
115. 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual September 8 2003 Part No 80439 1 2s y o d y LJ f ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System PIsiilolN TEKLOGIX Copyright 2003 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufac tured goods and services Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc All trademarks are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix warrants a return to factory warranty for a period of 90 days from shipment or 120 days from shipment where Psion Teklogix installs the equipment The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Service When requesting service please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred Type model and serial number should also be provided Before r
116. 73 0101 1101 77 M 4D 01110100 116 t 74 0101 1110 78 N 4E 0111 0101 117 u 75 0101 1111 79 O 4F 0111 0111 118 v 76 0101 0000 80 P 50 0111 0111 119 w 77 0101 0001 81 Q 51 01111000 120 x 78 0101 0010 82 R 52 0111 1001 121 y 79 0101 0011 83 S 53 0111 1010 122 Z TA 0101 0100 84 T 54 0111 1011 123 7B 0101 0101 85 U 55 01111100 124 l TC 0101 0110 86 V 56 0111 1101 125 7D 0101 0111 87 W 57 0111 1110 126 TE 0101 1000 88 X 58 0111 1111 127 TF 0101 1001 89 Y 59 1000 0000 128 80 0101 1010 90 Z 5A 1000 0001 129 81 0101 1011 91 5B 10000010 130 82 0101 1100 92 5C 1000 0011 131 a 83 0101 1101 93 5D 10000100 132 a 84 0101 1110 94 5E 1000 0101 133 85 0101 1111 95 oF 10000110 134 86 0110 0000 96 60 1000 0111 135 87 0110 0001 97 a 61 1000 1000 136 88 0110 0010 98 b 62 1000 1001 137 89 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix C ASCII Character Table BINARY DEC ASCII HEX BINARY DEC ASCII HEX 1000 1010 138 8A 1011 0001 177 B1 1000 1011 139 i 8B 10110010 178 B2 1000 1100 140 8C 1011 0011 179 B3 1000 1101 141 i 8D 10110100 180 B4 10001110 142 A 8E 1011 0101 181 BS 1000 1111 143 A 8F 10110110 182 B6 10010000 144 E 90 1011 0111 183 B7 10010001 145 91 10111000 184 B8 10010010 146 92 1011 1001 185 B9 1001 0011 147
117. 73 ANSI equivalents 104 ANSI FK Remap 1795 AZERTY keyboard accessing function keys 77 completing a data field 95 description 54 entering data 777 error reply 165 FK Remap 5 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Open Fky Only 7 QWERTY keyboard accessing function keys 67 softkey labels changing 153 163 softkeys 31 55 36 key keyboard accessing function keys 63 44 key keyboard accessing function keys 57 56 key keyboard accessing function keys 59 G gang charger 7967 207 208 gang charger 7978 209 211 Gateway Default 784 Gateway See Default Gateway 184 gauge battery 31 42 GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data 175 GLL Geographic position Latitude and Longitude 175 Global Macros 181 183 adding special characters 183 displaying special characters ASCII 182 programming special keys 183 Global Positioning System Receiver See GPS 175 Global Positioning System Unit 220 234 GPS Global Positioning System Receiver 175 GGA 175 GLL 175 RMC 175 Tx Period 1 76 VTG 176 GPS parameters 175 GPS Unit 220 234 Grat Arp Max Ct 187 Grat Arp RX Dly 187 grey scale adjusting 127 Group ANSI Auto Term 147 160 Group Name 790 GroupName 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 Group Name See GroupName 88 H handstrap installing on 7035 17 helpdesk 3 A 1 hidden fields match 1 65 high performance SE1200HP scanner 130 236 H Match Chr 65 Home Agent 186 Home Agent Disc 786
118. 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 135 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Code 39 Mod 43 Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the Mod 43 check digit is calculated Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the Mod 10 check digit is calculated Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data AIAG Strip If this parameter is enabled set to Y the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code AN Note This parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature This is because the terminal performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature if the prefix is stripped the data is not identified as AIAG Err Accept If the Err Accept and AIAG Strip parameters are enabled set to Y all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted If the Err Accept parameter is disabled set to N and the AIAG Strip parameter is enabled set to Y the label data is not accepted Size Chars Size Chars
119. 8260 Terminals User Manual PwrON xmit Radio information screen F 9 INDEX Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal A ABC keyboard 8255 amp 8260 73 alpha keys accessing 73 function keys accessing 73 macro keys accessing 76 aborts radio link TRX7370 ra 86 aborts radio link 802 11 SS ra 86 Access 19 accessories antenna types 2 2 bar code readers connecting 199 part numbers 222 picker cradle 7035 212 pre regulator transient suppressor 220 transient suppressor 220 7942 in unit charger 203 7967 battery pack charger 207 7978 battery pack charger 209 7978 in unit charger 209 acknowledgements transmitted xa 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 acknowledgements received 802 1Qv1 ra 88 802 10v2 ra 88 Addendum 40 141 142 address MAC 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 addresses network See also Network addresses 184 address info 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 90 Adhoc and Infra networks D 3 D 10 advanced long range SE1200ALR scanner 130 236 AIAG AIAG Strip 136 Mixed AIAG 169 AIAG Strip 136 aiming dot duration of 134 AirFortress Secure Client E Access ID changing E 3 connections resetting E 4 diagnostics viewing E 5 encryption turning on and off E 4 launching E 3 menu E 3 password assigning or changing E 3 resetting connections E 4 setup menu E 3 Allow Teklogix 794 Alpha parameters 1715 ALR advanced long range scanner 130 236 Anchor View x origin 173
120. 83 5 047 617 5 103 461 5 113 445 5 130 520 5 140 144 5 142 550 5 149 950 5 157 687 5 168 148 5 168 149 5 180 904 5 229 591 5 230 088 5 235 167 5 243 655 5 247 162 5 250 791 5 250 792 5 262 627 5 280 163 5 280 164 5 280 498 5 304 786 5 304 788 5 321 246 5 367 151 5 373 148 5 378 882 5 377 361 5 396 053 5 396 055 5 399 846 5 408 081 5 410 139 5 410 140 5 412 198 5 418 812 5 420 411 5 436 440 5 444 231 5 449 891 5 449 893 5 468 949 5 479 000 5 479 002 5 479 441 5 504 322 5 528 621 5 532 469 5 543 610 5 545 889 5 552 592 5 578 810 5 589 680 D305 885 D341 584 D344 501 D359 483 D362 435 D363 700 D363 918 D370 478 Invention No 55 358 62 539 69 060 69 187 Taiwan No 1 601 796 1 907 875 1 955 269 Japan European Patent 367 299 414 281 367 300 367 298 UK 2 072 832 France 81 03938 Italy 1 138 713 1 3 4 The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCD or VFD AN Note The 8235 terminal is available with a liquid crystal display LCD or a vacuum fluorescent display VFD A Expansion Port Scanner Port Figure 1 6 The 8255 Vehicle Mount Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 11 Chapter 1 Introduction The 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCD Only 1 3 5 The 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCD Only 2s E O y y LJ Keyboard Connector Figure 1 8 8260 Ports 12 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual ASSEMBLY AND Basic OPERATION
121. BM 5250 terminal AN Note These keys are active at all times in TESS applications Key Function Key Sequence Cursor Movement A Cursor moves to the first position in the next Field Advance or lt CTRL gt lt RIGHT gt input field If already in the last field the cursor Tab arrow key moves to the first input field on the screen Cursor moves to the beginning of the current Field Backspace lt CTRL gt lt LEFT gt field If already in the first position the cursor arrow key ee moves to beginning of the previous field Current field is cleared from the cursor position Field Exit lt CTRL gt lt DOWN gt to the end of the field and the cursor moves to the arrow key next input field Home lt CTRL gt lt UP gt Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen arrow key 5 3 Data Entry The terminal accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer The following actions cause the terminal to transmit e Pressing a function key or the lt ENTER gt key which is considered to be lt FO gt causes the terminal to transmit e Completing data entry into a transmit on entry field also causes the terminal to transmit 94 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 5 TESS Operations TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement There are several ways to configure the terminal to complete a data field e Pressing lt ENTER gt after entering d
122. Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Underline The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Underline ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline 7 1 2 8 Features Features Rang Kbd Locked N Y N Disable Beep N Y N Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock set to Y or unlock set to N the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS When the keyboard is locked the function keys arrow keys and the lt ENTER gt key are still functional The terminal emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked Changes to this parameter take effect only after the terminal is reset Disable Beep Setting this parameter to Y disables the beep generated by the o G and TESS commands Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled 172 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters View Manager 1 8 View Manager View Manager Range Anchor View N Y N X origin 1 1 80 Y origin 1 1 24 Use Increment N Y N
123. C2 12 0011 0000 48 0 30 0001 0011 19 DC3 13 0011 0001 49 1 31 0001 0100 20 DC4 14 0011 0010 50 2 32 0001 0101 21 NAK 15 0011 0011 51 3 33 0001 0110 22 SYN 16 0011 0100 52 4 34 0001 0111 23 ETB 17 0011 0101 53 5 35 0001 1000 24 CAN 18 0011 0110 54 6 36 0001 1001 25 EM 19 0011 0111 55 7 37 0001 1010 26 SUB 1A 0011 1000 56 8 38 0001 1011 27 ESC 1B 0011 1001 57 9 39 0001 1100 28 FS 1C 0011 1010 58 E 3A 0001 1101 29 GS 1D 0011 1011 59 i 3B Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual C 1 Appendix C ASCII Character Table C 2 BINARY DEC ASCII HEX BINARY DEC ASCII HEX 0011 1100 60 lt 3C 0110 0011 99 C 63 0011 1101 61 3D 01100100 100 d 64 0011 1110 62 gt 3E 0110 0101 101 e 65 0011 1111 63 2 3F 01100110 102 f 66 0101 0000 64 40 0110 0111 103 g 67 0101 0001 65 A 41 01101000 104 h 68 0101 0010 66 B 42 0110 1001 105 i 69 0101 0011 67 C 43 0110 1010 106 j 6A 0101 0100 68 D 44 0110 1011 107 k 6B 0101 0101 69 E 45 0110 1100 108 l 6C 0101 0110 70 F 46 0110 1101 109 m 6D 0101 0111 71 G 47 0110 1110 110 n 6E 0101 1000 72 H 48 0110 1111 111 o 6F 0101 1001 73 l 49 0111 0000 112 p 70 0101 1010 74 J 4A 0111 0001 113 q 71 0101 1011 75 K 4B 01110010 114 r 72 0101 1100 76 L 4C 0111 0011 115 S
124. DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER Software Fortress grants to Customer Licensee a non exclusive and non transferable right to use the current version of Fortress s Software Product Software described in the Fortress Product Description subject to the use rights and limitations in this Agreement Unless otherwise agreed in writing use of the Software is limited to the number of authorized users for which Licensee has purchased the right to the use of the software Software includes computer program s and any documentation Software contains proprietary technology of Fortress or third parties No ownership in or title to the Software is transferred Software is protected by copyright laws and international treaties Customer may make backup or archival copies of Software and use Software on a backup processor temporarily in the event of a processor malfunction Any full or partial copy of Software must include all copyright and other proprietary notices xiv Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual which appear on or in the Software Control functions may be installed and enabled Customer may not modify control utilities Customer may not disclose or make available Software to any other party or permit others to use it except Customer s employees and agents who use it on Customer s behalf and who
125. Density Data Rate Reservation Pwr Savin Rx Multicasts g L Sleep Duration Network Channel WEP Encrypt Key 1 Key 4 TX Key 1 802 1X Stored User ID E User Name Password 802 1Q v1 Auto Radio Addr H Radio Address L Initial RTT CIS Data Card information screen TRX7441 Cisco 802 11 b Direct Sequence SS Radio Radio ESSID Station Data Rate Pwr Saving TxPower RxMode EER eMode Network Channel Mixed Cells Auth Type WEP Encrypt Key 1 E Key 4 TX Key 1 LEAP User Name L Password CIS Data Radio information screen F 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Appendix F Parameter Trees Radio Menus Radio Cellular y Auto Radio Addr Channel Poll Timing L CIS Data Radio Address Channel Power up chan Channel Enable CH1 enable L CH20 enable Switch speed Manual table Tt CH1 list CH20 list Sync Delay Window Delay Poll Timeout Late Tx Limit Power Saving Ae Idle Poll Limit Pwr Off Time Radio information screen TRX7410 TRX7410A WLAN 902 Spread Specirum Radio Radio Radio Address Channel Wlan Timing Channel Power up chan Channel Enable CH1 enable L CH7 enable Channel Auto T Next ch auto 1 Next ch auto 7 Reinit tmo Power Saving PwrON time PwrOFF Time CIS Data Teklogix 7035 8255 amp
126. Keys The 44 key 7035 has 36 function keys the first 12 of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 24 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt FI2 gt Function keys lt F1 gt to lt F12 gt are directly accessible by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard that is a key combination is not required to access these function keys Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 57 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing Macro Keys A The first four function keys are positioned across the top of the 44 key keyboard Function keys lt F5 gt to lt F12 gt are located at the bottom portion of the keyboard For example e To access function key lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on through to lt F12 gt Accessing Ctrl Function Keys lt FI3 gt To lt F24 gt Accessing lt F13 gt to lt F24 gt requires a key combination you must press the lt CTRL gt key and then press one of function keys lt F1 gt through lt F12 gt For example to access function key lt F13 gt e Press the lt CTRL gt key followed by lt F1 gt To access function key lt F14 gt e Press lt CTRL gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing Shift Function Keys lt F25 gt To lt F36 gt Accessing lt F25 gt to lt F36 gt requires a key combination you must press the lt SHIFT gt key and then one of the
127. Laser Power 1 0 mW Max Average Radiant Power 1 0 mW Max Average Radiant Power Skew Tolerance 65 from normal Pulse Power Duration Continuous Continuous Scan Angle 42 2 23 2 Scan Repetition 36 3 scans second 36 3 scans second bidirectional bidirectional 60 from normal Pitch Angle 55 from normal 65 from normal Roll Tolerance 20 from vertical 10 from vertical Specular Dead Zone 2 from normal 2 from normal See page 239 Minimum bar See page 239 Minimum bar Decode Deptar Field as Omil 0127 mre width is 10 0 mil 0 254 mm Print Contrast 20 absolute dark light reflec 40 absolute dark light reflec Minimum tive measured at 675 nm tance measured at 675 nm Ambient Light Sunlight 8000 ft candles Sunlight 8000 ft candles Immunity Artificial Light 450 ft candles Artificial Light 450 ft candles Table 9 1 SEI200HP And SEI200LR Scanner Specifications Para eter 1035 Advanced Long Range 1035 2 D SE 1200ALR SE 2223 2 D Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bi directional 590 scans sec 22 frames sec Scan Angle Horizontal 13 34 Vertical 2 12 5 Scan Patterns Linear Linear and Smart Raster 236 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Parameter 1035 Advanced Long Range SE 1200ALR Chapter 9 Specifications Inter
128. Manual B 7 Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Flash Serial Download Cable PN 20075 B 8 Flash Serial Download Cable PN 20075 28 Pin PCR DEY Ground Ground Ground Shield BOOT_MON_EXT Scanner Serial In Transmit Scanner Serial Out Receive Female Female 7030 8055 8060 TERMINAL PC SERIAL PORT B 9 Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable PN 30092 Honda 28 Pin PCR 8 Pin DIN Ground Ground Shield CASE Shield Scanner Data Scanner Data 5V Scanner Power 5V Ground Ground Female Female TERMINAL SCANNER CABLE B 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX C ASCII CHARACTER TABLE BINARY DEC ASCII HEX BINARY DEC ASCII HEX 0000 0000 0 NUL 00 0001 1110 30 RS 1E 0000 0001 1 SOH 01 0001 1111 31 US 1F 0000 0010 2 STX 02 0010 0000 32 Space 20 0000 0011 3 ETX 03 0010 0001 33 21 0000 0100 4 EOT 04 0010 0010 34 22 0000 0101 5 ENQ 05 0010 0011 35 23 0000 0110 6 ACK 06 0010 0100 36 24 0000 0111 7 BELL 07 0010 0101 37 25 0000 1000 8 BS 08 0010 0110 38 8 26 0000 1001 9 TAB 09 0010 0111 39 27 0000 1010 10 LF OA 0010 1000 40 28 0000 1011 11 VT 0B 0010 1001 41 29 0000 1100 12 FF 0C 0010 1010 42 2A 0000 1101 13 CR 0D 0010 1011 43 2B 0000 1110 14 SO 0E 0010 1100 44 j 2C 0000 1111 15 SI OF 0010 1101 45 2D 0001 0000 16 DLE 10 0010 1110 46 2E 0001 0001 17 DC1 11 0010 1111 47 2F 0001 0010 18 D
129. Manual Table is set to Y the terminal uses the channel switching lists specified in the Manual Table Each channel list consists of up to 8 channels with all channels enabled before they are entered into the Manual Table If communication quality falls below 46 only the channels entered in the Manual Table are considered for channel switching The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table To move the cursor to the right to the next channel in a channel list e Press the lt TAB gt key To move the cursor to the left in a channel list e Press lt SHIFT gt lt TAB gt e Warning Itis not recommended that the Manual table parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance D 16 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters Poll Timing D 3 3 Poll Timing Poll Timing Range Sync Delay 17 1 40 Window Delay 19 1 40 Poll Timeout 20 1 200 Late Tx Limit 2 1 10 Sync Delay Important This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing Sync delay specifies the delay between the time of the base station transmission and the first response window measured in milliseconds The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base
130. N FIRE mix with other battery types charge above specified rate connect improperly or short circuit the battery Any of these actions can result in overheating explosion or leakage of cell contents DO NOT INCINERATE or subject battery cells to temperatures in excess of 100 C 212 F Such treatment can vaporize the liquid electrolyte causing cell rupture Incineration may result in harmful emissions or explosion DO NOT charge use or store batteries below 30 C 22 F Batteries must be handled in accordance with all applicable state and federal laws and regulations Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 43 KEYBOARDS OPERATING AS 3 1 Keyboard Layouts se ses mep sae adena o 47 3 1 1 7035 Hand Held Terminal Keyboards 47 3 1 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards 47 3 2 Keyboard Keys A Description oaao 48 3 2 1 The Status Area 7035 Only ce siaa aa eae i aa a ae 48 3 2 2 lt ORANGE gt And lt BLUE gt Keys anaua 48 3 2 3 The Standard Key Secs s oe nie ca a ee i he a 49 3 2 4 Key Lock Function gt e es o o ententes darca 52 3 2 4 1 The 7035 Hand Held Key Lock Function 52 3 2 4 2 8255 amp 8260 Key Lock Function 52 3 2 5 The Function Keys 26 26282 2 ee ee oD ee eee Re ee RS 54 3 2 6 The Macro Keys 3 2 0 1d hoe Pe eee ba Bee ge eee de 55 3 3 44 Key 7035 Keyboards 2 2 20 0 0 0002 eee eee
131. Other Sessions To list the current sessions e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type sess in lowercase letters and press lt ENTER gt To move to another session e At the TCP gt prompt type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move e g Type sess 2 to move to session 2 e Press lt ENTER gt Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 105 Chapter 6 ANSI Operations Closing A Session 6 4 3 Closing A Session To close a session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a e At the TCP gt prompt type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close e g Type cl 2 to close session 2 e Press lt ENTER gt 6 4 4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR LF between each line e Press lt CTRL gt and type p The screen will be printed using the port configured as Print 6 4 5 Smart Echo Disabling In some circumstances like entering a password you may want to temporarily disable smart echo disguising the characters you type with periods e Press lt ALT gt and type a lt period e Type the necessary information using the terminal keyboard and then press lt ENTER gt to return to smart echo mode 106 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual SETTING PARAMETERS 7 1 Using The Parameter Manager o o e
132. RL h 99 sent bytes outbytes 85 sent packets outpkts 85 serial peripheral port 9 serial I O fields 94 serial in In 1 66 SI FnKey 168 SI Mode 66 SI Prefix 167 SI Suffix 68 Serial NO 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 Serial Number 129 serial number Scan See 180 serial out Out 168 SO Prefix 168 SO Suffix 768 Serial parameters for TESS Settings 1 66 serial port 6 Exclusive 759 166 In Serial In 166 Out Serial Out 168 pass through 177 SI FnKey Serial In 168 SI Mode Serial In 166 SI Prefix Serial In 167 SI Suffix Serial In 68 SO Prefix Serial Out 168 SO Suffix Serial Out 168 serial port settings 177 Serial Settings 176 180 Serial 1 Port Settings Buffer 1 79 Data Bits 178 disabling 176 enabling 176 Flow Control 78 Input Tmo 779 IrDA Printer option 177 Output option 176 Parity 178 peripheral devices 176 Print option 176 Retries 179 Retry Tmo 79 Scanner option 176 Speed 778 Stop Bits 778 service information 3 A sessions windows cycling through 84 setting the terminal number 93 SE1200ALR 1 30 236 SE1200HP 130 236 SE1200LR 236 SE2223 2 D 130 236 SHIFT Key 49 Short Code bar code option 33 SI FnKey Serial In 68 SI Mode Serial In 166 Simple Network Management SNMP SeeSNMP 189 Simultan Binds 788 SI Prefix Serial In 167 SI Suffix Serial In 768 size of fields 137 Size Chars bar code scanning 136 skew scanning 238 Sled See picker cradle 212 Sleep Duration Pwr Saving D 3
133. SI running at the same time A TESS or ANSI session window occupies the entire terminal screen with other sessions present in the background Only one application session window can be active at a time To display a specific configured application e Press the lt ALT gt key followed by the application number For example press lt ALT gt 1 to display application number 1 lt ALT gt 2 to display application number 2 and so on AN Note The session the terminal displays on boot up is the last application to load If for example TESS is the first application and ANSI is the last then the last application in this case ANSI is displayed when the terminal is powered up To display the radio screen e Press lt ALT gt 9 To cycle through the application session windows in sequence beginning with the radio screen e Press lt ALT gt lt F6 gt Beginning with the radio screen each time this key combination is pressed the next session window becomes active 4 4 Radio Statistics Screens A radio statistics screen is automatically created when TekTerm is started and contains appropriate statistics for the installed radio Depending on the type of radio installed in your terminal the radios statistics screen may vary 4 4 1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen The display the radio statistics screen e Press lt ALT gt 9 84 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 4 Tekterm 802 11 R
134. SV_Ext 5V unswitched 500 mA fuse 22 BXT_Data For Teklogix use only 23 NC NC 24 BXT_CLK For Teklogix use only 25 RTS1 Request to send output RS 232D Serial 26 CTS1 Clear to send input RS 232D Port1 27 SERIAL1_TX Serial transmit data RS 232D COM1 28 SERIALI_ RX Serial receive data RS 232D Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual B 3 Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255 60 Expansion Port I O Connector 36 Pin PCR B 3 8255 60 Expansion Port 1 0 Connector 36 Pin PCR Function Pin Signal Name Description alee 1 GND System ground 2 GND System ground ie 3 MIC Microphone input 4 SPKR Speaker output Ground 5 SHIELD System ground 6 EXP_PORT O Reserved for future expansion Ground 7 GND System ground 8 EXP_PORT 1 Reserved for future expansion Ground 9 GND System ground 10 EXP_PORT 2 Reserved for future expansion Ground 11 GND System ground 12 EXP_PORT 3 Reserved for future expansion Ground 13 GND System ground 14 EXP_PORT 4 Reserved for future expansion 15 EXP_PORT 5 Reserved for future expansion Ground 16 GND System ground 17 EXP_PORT 6 Reserved for future expansion 18 RTS_2 EXP_PORT_COM1 19 CTS_2 EXP_PORT_COM1 20 TXD_2 EXP_PORT_COM1 21 RXD_2 EXP_PORT_COM1 foes 22 8 0V 8V output 500 mA fuse 23 8 0V 8V output
135. Size Chars Size Chars Range Prefix Char 0 0 255 Suffix Char 0 0 255 Strip Leading 0 0 127 Strip Trailing 0 0 127 Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Enter the ASCII decimal value of this character from 0 to 255 Enter a value of 0 zero if no prefix is to be added Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character from 0 to 255 Enter a value of 0 zero if no suffix is to be added Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added AN Notes 1 The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character For example if lt DEL gt is pressed the usual action for that key is performed With ANSI emulation the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data 2 For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 139 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters EAN 8 Addendum A N Important Before Addend
136. Smart Echo 156 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 189 Access 797 Auth Trap 790 Batt Thresh 792 Communities 790 Community 1797 Contact 190 CQ Thresh 792 Group Name 790 GroupName 802 IQv1 88 GroupName 802 1Qv2 88 IP 9 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XIX Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Location 190 Name 790 Row Status 791 SNMP Enable 790 SysName 802 1Qv1 88 SysName 802 1Qv2 88 SNMP Enable 790 softkeys Function keys 113 F1 Nextkey 31 55 F2 Previous key 31 55 F3 Default key 31 55 F4 Save key 31 55 softkey labels changing 153 163 SO Prefix Serial Out 168 SO Suffix Serial Out 168 Sound parameters error and scan beeps 192 SPACE Key 5 special keys programming into macros 183 specifications advanced long range ALR scanner SE1200ALR 236 battery 229 24 battery pack Li Ion 202 battery pack compatibility specific to picker cradle 2 9 COM 1 233 COM 2 233 CPU 228 cradle picker 218 for 7035 terminal 228 high performance HP scanner SE1200HP 236 long range LR scanner SE1200LR 236 memory expansion 229 231 234 picker cradle 2 8 radio specs 225 227 scanner 236 SE1200ALR 236 SE1200HP 236 SE1200LR 236 SE2223 2 D 236 2 D scanner SE2223 2 D 236 XX Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual specular dead zone 238 Speed 778 spread spectrum 902 radio parameters D 19 D 22 spread spectrum radio 902 D 19 Sta
137. TRX7370 86 802 IQv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 transmitting data 155 170 transmit on entry field 94 trigger double click 133 trouble shooting tips scanning 36 TRX7370 narrow band radio parameters D 13 specs 225 TRX7410 10A TekLan 902 DS SS radio parameters D 19 specs 226 TRX7431 Lucent 802 11 DS SS radio parameters D 1 specs 226 TRX7441 802 11b DS radio parameters 225 specs 225 two dimensional SE2223 2 D scanner 130 236 TX transmit key TRX7431 D 4 TRX7441 D 12 Tx Period 176 Tx Power Pwr Saving D 9 Type Code 128 138 Type of scanner 130 Typematic Rpt 22 typing in upper case 65 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal U UCC Code 128 138 underline video attribute 54 underline video attribute 172 unlocking keys 52 121 UPCA 14 UPCE 1 4 Upper ANSI Host Char Set 154 Upper Case 1 65 uppercase letters 123 Use DHCP 185 Use Increment X Increment 773 Y Increment 73 Use increment 73 Vv va variance of round trip time 802 IQv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 variance of round trip time va 802 I1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 Verify 133 Version Scan See 180 version number 802 1Qv1 displaying 87 vertical tab CTRL K 157 VGA palette remapping 127 video attributes 153 154 171 Blink 754 172 Bold 154 171 Faint 154 171 Normal 54 171 Reverse 154 172 Underline 54 172 visible fields match 1 65 V Match Chr 1 65 Volume 33 volume adjusting 120 VTG Track made good
138. TRX7441 PC Card 802 11b DS SS beginning on page 225 for instalation and usage information Refer to Program License Agreements on page xi for details about the end user license agreement Regulatory Information TRX7441 PC Card 802 11b DS SS The Cisco Air350 series PC Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product This device complies with the following radio and frequency safety standards Canada Industry Canada IC This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Europe EU Declaration of Conformity E06500 This device complies with the essential requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC with essential test suites as per standards ETS 300 3289 Technical requirements for radio equipment ETS 300 826 General EMC requirements for radio equipment Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 225 Chapter 9 Specifications Radio Specifications USA Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment generates and may radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco installation instruction it may cause interference with radio and television reception This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of FCC rules These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interfer
139. Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7410 10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters D 4 TRX7410 104 WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters WLAN 902 SS Range gt Radio Address 0 0 3840 Channel see text Wlan Timing see text Power Saving Y see text CIS Data Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal D 4 1 Channel Channel Range Channel 1 1 7 Power up chan Y Y N Channel Enable see text Channel Auto see text Channel This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal The channel selected must be an enabled channel Refer to Channel Enable on page D 20 for details about enabling channels Power Up Chan If this parameter is enabled set to Y the terminal will start communicating on the channel specified in the Channel parameter when the terminal is powered up This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites If this parameter is disabled set to N the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 19 Appendix D
140. The 7035 Hand Held Terminal 7 1 3 3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers 11 1 3 4 The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCD orVFD 11 1 3 5 The 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCD Only 12 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual I 1 About This Manual This manual describes how to operate the Teklogix 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the 7035 hand held terminal along with the 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation explains how to attach an antenna how to mount vehicle mount terminals and work with internal and external power supplies This chapter also describes the the terminal indicators as well as providing operating instructions for freezer terminals Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions describes how to use the lt BLUE gt and lt ORANGE gt keys along with all other keyboard keys Chapter 4 Tekterm outlines how to work with application sessions within the Tekterm program Chapter 5 TESS Operations describes editing modes status messages and control commands for TESS operations Chapter 6 ANSI Operations provides information about function key equivalents and data entry for ANSI operations Chapter 7 Setting Parameters lists and defines the terminal parameters Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories prov
141. Velcro Belt 18785 001 7035 Vinyl Carrying Case 30586 001 7035 Splash Resistant Carrying Case 30586 101 Rubber Carrying Case For 7035 with integrated scanner 21425 Rubber Carrying Case For 7035 without integrated scanner 31669 Mounts And Holding Devices 7035 Picker Cradle vehicle bench non powered 7937A 7035 Picker Cradle vehicle 11 16VDC 7937B 7035 Picker Cradle vehicle 10 55VDC 7937C Active Transient Filter Power Supply 8742 7035 Port Replicator Kit 21658 7035 Fixed Mount 18448 001 7035 Pedestal Mount w locking joint 18447 001 Heavy duty Pedestal Mount with locking joint 30082 7035 Scanner Mounting Plate accepts 7862 holder 18449 001 7035 Scanner Holder vehicle mount 7862 7035 Long Scanner Holder vehicle mount 7982A Pistol Grip Assembly Kit For integrated scanner versions only 20639 Table 8 4 Accessory Part Numbers Model Numbers 222 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual SPECIFICATIONS 9 1 Radio Specifications 2 ee 225 9 2 7035 Hand Held Terminal Specifications o ooo 228 9 3 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications 230 9 4 Peripheral Ports sss stess tg A abena eb ae ae bee we ke e 233 9 4 1 Serial Port COM 1 o xxs e ee eke eee ewe aba aw oe x 233 9 4 2 Serial Port 2 COM 2 26 cece eee eee eee ee ee wes 233 9 5 Memory Expansion Board 0 00000 ee eee 234 9 6 IrDA Port 035 Only 2
142. acklight parameters vary depending on the type of terminal used 7035 hand held 8255 or 8260 vehicle mount 7 5 1 1 7035 Backlight Parameters Backlight Range Threshold 100 O e4 255 On Time 60 sec see text Intensity 0 Die se Threshold The 7035 is equipped with automatic light sensing The value entered in this parameter determines how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on The allowable range is 0 to 255 The higher the value the darker the ambient light must be before the backlight turns on On Time The value entered in this parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed a scan is completed or data is received On Time is measured in seconds The allowable values are Disabled 5 secs 10 secs 15 secs 20 secs 30 secs 60 secs and Always On Choosing Disabled turns the backlight feature off Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly whether or not a key is pressed or data is received Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7035 terminal screen The allowable range is 5 to 5 The higher the value the greater the screen light intensity Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 125 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters A 7 5 1 2 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters Backlight Rang Screen Alwa
143. adio Statistics Screen 4 4 2 802 11 Radio Statistics Screen Statistics CO 100 inpkts 1464 outpkts 62 inbyte 217590 outbyte 5204 inerrs 62 outerrs droppkt The statistics represented in the sample screen above are defined as follows CQ inpkts outpkts inbyte outbyte inerrs outerrs droppkt communication quality represented as a percentage value with 100 indicating excellent communication quality total number of received packets total number of sent packets total number of received bytes total number of sent bytes total number of received packets with errors total number of packet send errors total number of dropped packets Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 85 Chapter 4 Tekterm TRX7370 NB amp 802 11 SS Radio Statistics Screen 4 4 3 TRX7370 NB amp 802 11 SS Radio Statistics Screen r Statistics Connection cq 35 ch 20 sc 3 xm 17 xr 1 xi 4 xe 0 rm 21 ra 3 rp 106 pt 253 The statistics represented in the sample screen above are defined as follows cq ch sc xm XI Xi Xe rm ra pt communication quality represented as a percentage value with 100 indicating excellent communication quality operating channel scan state indicates the current channel search state total number of transmitted messages total number of retransmissions total number of transmitted initialize messages total n
144. al scanner the Console 2 port is disabled External The External external parameter must match the type of external scanner attached to the terminal Wand or Non Decoded If an external scanner is not being used set this parameter to None 1 6 2 Options Short Click Click Scan Scan Options Translate Verify Security Code Time Data Result Indic Result t Time Dot Time Range see text 0 0 15 0 0 99 N Y N 250 0 1000 Oi 255 X Y N Y Y N 0 0 20 2 0 sec 0 3 0 Sec Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 131 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Translate 7 6 2 1 Translate Translate In 1 Out 1 In 8 Out 8 VAN Important For detailed instructions on inserting characters or special keys e g lt ENTER gt lt DEL gt etc in these fields refer to Global Macros on page 181 to page 183 HOWEVER keep in mind that these string entry fields do NOT accept Function keys and Arrow keys In n This string entry parameter is compared with the decoded bar code reading If there is a match the Out string is translated into the decoded bar code The first character of the In string specifies where the rest of the string can occur within the decoded bar code reading The possible values for this character include b Compare with the beginning
145. amp 7942 211 212 time full charge 205 7942 specs 206 7967specs 208 7978 specs 209 charge time required 206 charging batteries 205 Char Set TESS 64 check digit 139 142 143 144 145 Chk Digit 1 143 144 Chk Digit 2 143 Cisco 802 11 b DS SS 2 4GHz licensing agreement xii parameters 225 D 8 specs 225 CIS Data Card Information Structure D 7 D 13 D 18 D 22 Click Data scanner double click 134 Click Time scanner double click 33 Client Side Emulation 5 CLR DEL Key description of 50 in Local Echo mode ANSI 157 TESS sessions CLR key behaviour in 96 Codabar 142 Code 11 143 Code 128 138 Code 39 135 136 Code 93 142 colours remapping 127 columns number of in ANSI screen 1 52 number of in TESS screen 767 Columns ANSI 52 Columns TESS 6 Communities 190 Community 9 configuring softkey labels 153 163 Connect Inc Client Side Emulation 5 connecting Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 150 ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 149 Login ANSI Telnet Settings 150 Login Failed ANSI Telnet Settings 151 Login Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 150 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 150 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 151 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 150 connection host 148 160 Conn Type connection type 148 160 Console Settings 176 180 Console 2 Port Settings Buffer 1 79 Data Bits 1 78 disabling 176 enabling 176 Input Tmo 179 Nomad option 176 Parity 178 peripheral devices 176 Print optio
146. an intended third party beneficiary of the agreement Vil ma The software included in the Cisco Adapter and Driver Software and any related documentation constitutes the confidential information of licensor or its suppliers and cannot be disclosed to any third parties AirFortress amp trade License Indemnification Fortress will defend any action brought against Customer based on a claim that any Fortress Product infringes any U S patents or copyrights excluding third party software provided that Fortress is immediately notified in writing and Fortress has the right to control the defense of all such claims lawsuits and other proceedings If as a result of any claim of infringement against any U S patent or copyright Fortress is enjoined from using the Product or if Fortress believes the Product is likely to become the subject of a claim of infringement Fortress at its option and expense may procure the right for Customer to continue to use the Product or replace or modify the Product so as to make it non infringing If neither of these two options is reasonably practicable Fortress may discontinue the license granted herein on one month s written notice and refund to Licensee the unamortized portion of the license fees hereunder The depreciation shall be an equal amount per year over the life of the Product as established by Fortress The foregoing states the entire liability of Fortress and the sole and exclusive remedy of
147. and ground speed 176 VT220 Function keys equivalent Teklogix keyboard Function keys 104 v1 802 1Qv1 version number 87 W warnings 134 warranty 3 Watchdog Timer 728 WaveLAN 802 PC card Lucent TRX7431 parameters D 1 specs 226 website address A 4 WEP Encrypt TRX7431 D 3 encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 D 4 TX key D 4 WEP Encrypt TRX7441 D 11 encryption keys Key 1 to Key 4 D 12 LEAP D 2 TX key D 12 Window Delay D 17 wireless LAN Wlan timeout D 2 WLAN Timing Reinit Tmo or 902 D 21 WLAN 902 spread spectrum radio D 19 Working 84 worldwide offices 3 A 3 wrapping characters automatically 52 X xa transmitted acknowledgements 802 IQv1 88 802 IQv2 88 xe transmit failures TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 xi transmitted initialize messages TRX7370 86 802 IQv1 88 802 IQv2 88 802 11 SS 86 X Increment 773 X Increment manual panning 124 xm transmitted messages Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XXIII Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal TRX7370 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Q0v2 87 802 11 SS 86 Xmit Count 55 Xmit Wait 55 X origin 173 x origin 173 xr retransmissions 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 xr TRX7370 retransmissions 86 xr 802 11 SS retransmissions 86 Y Y N parameters enabling and disabling 115 Y Increment 173 Y Increment manual panning 124 Y origin 173 y origin 173 1 Chk Digit 143 144 2 Chk Digit 143 2 D SE2223 2 D
148. ansmission After this threshold the transmission will not be attempted and the terminal will try again at the next opportunity For example suppose this parameter is set to 5 From the beginning of the response window the terminal can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission Beyond this threshold the transmission is not attempted The terminal waits for the next opportunity D 3 4 Power Saving m Power Saving Rang Idle Poll Limit 10 1 200 Pwr Off Time 10 1 60 Idle Poll Limit This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities base station polls with available response windows must be consecutively skipped for the terminal to put the radio into power down mode for power saving Lower values cause the terminal to go into power saving mode quickly extending battery life but reducing terminal responsiveness Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life Idle Poll Limit is only used when Power Saving is enabled set to Y Pwr Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time in seconds the terminal will keep the radio in power down mode when a power down period has been initiated Pwr Off Time is only used when Power Saving is enabled set to Y D 3 5 CIS Data This sub menu displays Card Information Structure CIS data manufacturer information describing the radio installed in the terminal D 18
149. ar code Short Code When enabled set to Y this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes 2 characters When Short Code is disabled set to N these short bar codes are rejected Setting this parameter to Y may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the terminal must decode more potential bar codes For this reason it is not recommended that Short Code be enabled for general purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters Click Time AN Note This parameter only effects terminals using long range scanners This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter see page 134 When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 133 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Other Options Click Data For
150. aracter is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty that is any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the lt DEL gt key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep The lt DEL gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 97 Chapter 5 TESS Operations Lock Messages Insert mode In a left justified field the lt DEL gt function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is at the right end of the char acter string in this case it erases the character to the left of the cursor When the last character in a field is erased the field remains empty and any further lt DEL gt functions in the empty field result in a key board error beep In a right justified field the lt DEL gt function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the remaining data one position to the right If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of that field the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased it remains in the right most position in the field When the last characte
151. arameter to N Out This parameter enables serial port output fields S0 Prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial output A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character S0 Suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial output A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character 7 1 2 5 Tests Tests Range AutoRep Fn 1 1 36 AutoRep T O 0 0 255 AutoRep Fn This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode The value represents the number of the function key not the ASCII decimal equivalent After sending this key the terminal locks and waits for the host to unlock the terminal To disable AutoRep Fn set the AutoRep T O parameter to zero 168 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Scanner AutoRep 1 0 This parameter determines the time in seconds between the terminal unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the AutoRep Fn parameter A value of zero disables auto reply mode 7 7 2 6 Scanner Scanner Range ContNxtField Y Y N Append Enter Y Y N Append FO Y Y N Mixed AIAG N Y N Rjct if Alpha N Y N Beam Lockout N Y N
152. ards are equipped with a set of keys standard across all keyboards These are described in Keyboard Keys A Description beginning on page 48 Accessing additional keys such as alpha keys function keys and macro keys varies slightly depending on the type of terminal and keyboard used A description of each type of keyboard and the methods used to access these keys is outlined in Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions beginning on page 57 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Terminal Indicators 2 8 Terminal Indicators Teklogix terminals use LEDs Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and beepers as indicators 2 8 1 LEDs Transmit And Receive Two LEDs indicate the transmit and receive status of data On the 7035 they are located on the left and right of the lt SCAN gt key On the vehicle mounts the LEDs are located to the left on the keyboard and are labelled TX and RX The amber TX transmit LED flashes when the terminal transmits data e The green RX receive LED flashes momentarily during the boot process After boot up it flashes when the terminal receives data Key Shift LEDs 8255 And 8260 Only The 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals are equipped with additional LEDs that indicate whether or not a mode key is locked on Mode keys include lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt For example
153. asic Operation The Battery Pack Removing And Installing g Warning When a battery is removed from the terminal a backup of the system application and any work in progress is maintained for up to 10 minutes A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute time frame THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot Even after the system backup has expired the date and time are maintained for 100 hours without a battery To remove the battery pack e Turn the terminal upside down antenna pointing down e Grasp the unit around the keypad area with your forefinger resting on the battery release button The battery release button is located at the base of the terminal just above the 28 pin port e Press the button until the battery unlatches Battery Release Button Figure 2 1 Battery Compartment Of The 7035 Terminal To install the battery pack e Insert the battery pack with the textured plastic facing you Click the battery into place 16 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Attaching The 7035 Hand Strap Or The Pistol Grip 2 2 3 Attaching The 7035 Hand Strap Or The Pistol Grip A amp L Note For a list of additional accessories refer to Accessories List on page 222 2 2 3 1 Attaching The Hand Strap A amp L Note A Phillips head scre
154. ata e Pressing a function key after entering data e Pressing an arrow key after entering data e Filling an auto tab field 5 5 1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below Press lt CTRL gt f to enter field mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field In field mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys do not perform any functions Pressing the lt UP gt or lt DOWN gt arrow key completes the entry field and then moves the cursor to the previous or next field Field mode Press lt CTRL gt u to enter fcursor mode In this mode once data entry into a field has been completed the entry cannot be changed Fcursor mode without retyping the entire field In fcursor mode the lt UP gt lt DOWN gt lt LEFT gt and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys move the cursor between fields Press lt CTRL gt i to enter insert mode In this mode data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered In insert mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field Insert mode Press lt CTRL gt r to enter replace mode In this mode data can be entered over previously
155. both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to TESS or ANSI following a double click Enter the ASCII value of the character desired from 0 to 255 You can also press the lt LEFT gt and lt RIGHT gt arrow keys to scroll through a set of ASCII characters not available from the keyboard Scan Result 7035 Only When this parameter is enabled set to Y the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the terminal screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and only as long as the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen Scan Indic 7035 Only When this parameter is enabled set to Y the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated For the Teklogix 7035 I integrated terminal this message is mandatory and appears even if this parameter is disabled set to N Dot Time 7035 Only A N Important Dot Time only appears in the Scanner Options menu when either Long Range or High Vis is selected as the internal scanner option Internal scanner options are described on page 130 under the heading Internal The value selected for Dot Time determines how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep The allowable values are 0 0 1 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 and 3 0 seconds
156. cessing SHIFT Function Keys lt F25 gt To lt F30 gt To access these function keys you ll need to press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example to access lt F25 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F1 gt To access lt F26 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing SHIFT ORANGE Function Keys lt F31 gt To lt F36 gt Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with the lt ORANGE gt key and the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F31 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt and then press lt Q gt key e To access lt F32 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt lt W gt and so on 3 6 3 Accessing QWERTY Macro Keys A N Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 8255 and 8260 keyboards offer 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt Depending on whether you are using an FZI to F6 or F1 To F10 keyboard accessing these keys differs slightly 3 6 3 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Macro Key Access Fl To F10 keyboards have 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt They are displayed in blue print above and to the right on alpha keys lt Q gt through lt P gt the first row of alpha keys and lt A gt through lt S gt on the second row of alpha keys You need to press the lt BLUE gt key followed by th
157. ck Time double click 133 ContNxtField 769 Dot Time 134 double click 133 high performance HP 130 236 laser beam 35 long range LR 130 236 operating 35 parameters for TESS Settings 169 Result Time 34 safety warnings 35 Scan See 180 SE1200ALR 130 236 SE1200HP 130 236 SE1200LR 236 SE2223 2 D 130 236 specifications 236 target dot duration 34 TESS Scanner parameters 69 two dimensional 2 D 130 236 Type of scanner 130 warning message 36 134 2 D two dimensional 730 236 scanning AIAG 169 aiming target dot duration 34 Append Enter 69 Append FO 69 appending characters 134 137 139 check digit 139 142 143 144 145 Click Data appending data 134 Click Time 33 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XVII Index XVIII Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal console port labelling 176 ContNxtField 769 country code 138 decode zones 239 Dot Time 34 double click 133 External scanner External external scanner types 131 identifying the type of scanner used 30 In translate 732 Internal internal scanner 730 locked terminal 170 Nomad 177 180 number system digit 141 142 operating the scanner 33 Out translate 132 pitch 238 prefix character 137 139 removing characters 137 139 Result Time 734 Rjct if Alpha 770 safety instructions 35 Scan Indication 1 34 Scan Result 734 Scan See 176 Scan Se
158. ck cursor e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through and choose an option 162 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Characters Softkeys AN Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 115 Softkeys F1 F2 F3 F4 AN Important The sample menu above reflects the 7035 hand held softkey options The Softkey menu for 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals equipped with 10 function key keyboards provide 10 softkey labels F1 to F10 Vehicle mounts with 6 function key keyboards list 6 softkey labels in this menu Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to this parameter To edit a label e Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Softkey menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function A amp L Note Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display 1 1 2 3 Characters Characters Ra
159. cle mount terminals equipped with 10 function key keyboards provide 10 softkey labels lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt Vehicle mounts with 6 function key keyboards list 6 softkey labels in this menu Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application These keys are identified through softkey labels reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to this parameter To edit a label e Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Softkey menu and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding key s function AN Note Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display n Video Range Normal BOLD see text Bold NONE see text Faint BOLD see text Blink BLNK see text Reverse REV see text Underline ULIN see text Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 153 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Host Char Set Normal The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Normal ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Bold The value assigned to this parameter specifies the a
160. clude Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 139 Addendum Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 133 must be set to Y Refer to Addendum on page 140 7 6 3 6 UPC E UPC E Exp to UPC A Y Inc Num Sys Y Include Chk yA Size Chars Addendum Disable Exp to UPC A Setting this parameter to Y enables a non standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 141 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Codabar Inc Num Sys If this parameter is enabled set to Y the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data Include Chk When enabled the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 139 Addendum AN Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 133 must be set to Y Refer to Addendum on page 140 7 6 3 1 Codabar Codabar Size Chars Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136 7 6 3 8 Code 93 Code 93 Size Chars Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 136
161. cond time AN Note The default key lock function of the lt ORANGE gt key can be changed using the One Shot Mode parameter see page 121 52 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 8255 amp 8260 Key Lock Function Locking And Unlocking The lt BLUE gt Key To lock this key on e Press the lt BLUE gt key twice To unlock or turn off the lt BLUE gt key e Press the lt BLUE gt key a third time Locking And Unlocking The lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt And lt SHIFT gt Keys AN Important On 8255 and 8260 terminals locking and unlocking these keys differs slightly depending on which keyboard type you are using the F1 to F6 or the F1 to F10 keyboard see 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards on page 47 for a brief description The Fl To F10 Keyboard On this keyboard type the lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are printed in orange typeface on keys along the bottom row of the keyboard To lock the function of the any of these keys on e Press the lt ORANGE gt key e Then press the key on which either lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt or lt SHIFT gt is printed twice For example on a QWERTY keyboard to lock the function of the lt CTRL gt key on e Press lt ORANGE gt lt N gt lt N gt You ll know the key is locked on when the corresponding LED stays on To unlock or turn off any of
162. ctual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Faint This option allows you to adjust the intensity on the screen and is set to Bold by default The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Faint ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Reverse ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Underline The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Underline ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline 1 1 1 3 Host Char Set The Char Set menu allows you to specify a character set in the Lower and Upper character tables r Char Set Lower VT220 Fren Cdn Upper Arabic IR 127 154 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Transmit Note
163. culating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated the terminal will resend the transmission Because terminals cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions a starting point or Initial Round Trip Time is required The terminal uses the time assigned to the Initial RTT parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations Once the terminal begins transmitting and receiving data this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmis sions and acknowledgements CIS Data CIS Data Lucent Technologies WaveLAN IEEE Version 01 01 Pri 1 1 Sta 2 0 WEP 128 bit 00 60 1D 03 79 E5 10 FCC USA 20 Industry Canada This sub menu displays Card Information Structure CIS data manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal including the terminal hardware address Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 7 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters D 2 TRX7441 802 1 1b DS Radio Parameters 802 11 DS SS Range ESSID rfc see text Station see text Data Rate Auto see text Pwr Saving Y see text Network Infra Infra Adhoc Channel 10 1 14 Mixed Cells N Y N Auth Type None Open Shared WEP Encrypt N
164. customers may receive access to technical support services ranging from phone support to emergency on site system support by calling the toll free number below or via our secure web site AN Note Customers calling the toll free number should have their Psion Teklogix customer number or trouble ticket number available Voice 1 800 387 8898 Fax 1 905 812 6304 Web Site http service psionteklogix com A 1 2 International Support For technical support outside of Canada or the U S A please contact your local Psion Teklogix office See page A 3 for a listing of worldwide offices Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual A 1 A 2 WORLDWIDE OFFICES COMPANY HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Inc 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Tel 1 905 813 9900 Fax 1905 812 6300 Email salescdn psion com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES Psion Teklogix GmbH Jakob Kaiser StraBe 3 D 47877 Willich M nchheide Deutschland Tel 49 2154 9282 0 Fax 49 2154 9282 59 Email info teklogix de Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Tel 33 0 4 42 908 809 Fax 33 0 4 42 908 888 Email tekeuro psion com Psion Teklogix LTD 3 Lancaster Court Coronation Road High Wycombe Bucks HP123TD England Tel 44 1494 450666 Fax 44 1494 450155 WWW www teklogix co uk Email tekuk psion com Ps
165. d any work in progress is maintained for up to 10 minutes A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute time frame THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot Even after the system backup has expired the date and time are maintained for at least 72 hours without a battery 7035 Lithium Ion batteries typically operate for nine to fifteen hours after a charge These batteries do not require conditioning Each battery pack tracks its own capacity using an onscreen horizontal bar graph referred to as the battery gauge The battery gauge displays the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100 resolution 10 of nominal capacity The operator is notified when the battery capacity is low Typical battery life is 500 cycles or 2 years average use A fast charge is completed in 3 5 to 4 hours The 7035 terminal will notify the user when the battery performance has degraded to the point that it should be discarded l Times are approximate and may vary depending on operating conditions and the type of radio used 200 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Lithium lon Battery Safety Precautions 8 2 1 Lithium lon Battery Safety Precautions AN Important It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all warnings be s
166. d forwards an authentication response packet back to the radio indicating the success or failure of the decryption If the packet is successfully encrypted decrypted the user is authenticated D 10 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters The table following outlines the interaction between the Auth Type parameter and Mixed Cell parameter settings de id Mixed Cell Y Mixed Cell N Open The terminal radio can operate ina The terminal radio uses full encryption cell regardless of encryption used The Cisco Access point Encryption by The Cisco Access point Encryption Station parameter must be set to by Station parameter must be set to Full Encryption and Accept Open Authentication Accept Type Authentication Type parameter set to parameter set to Open Open The Psion Teklogix 9150 with WEP Enabled uses this method Shared The terminal radio can operate over a The terminal radio uses full encryption range of cells regardless of encryp The Cisco Access point Encryption by tion used Station parameter must be set to The Cisco Access point Encryption Full Encryption and Accept by Station parameter must be set to Authentication Type parameter set to Optional and Accept Authenti Shared cation Type parameter must be set to Shared None No authentication
167. d terminals Seamless operation on all Teklogix 32 bit narrowband RF backbones ANSI TESS IBM 3270 IBM5250 and HP2392 emulation application built in uses high performance TRX7370 narrowband radio Embedded DOS 7035 terminal has three types of keyboards 36 key 44 key and 56 key Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Features e Ergonomic design 7035 offers one handed scan amp confirm design all terminals provide high visibility display fonts and low impact keys full alphanumeric keyboard keyboard can be customized using soft label function keys macro keys and keyboard remapping tools vehicle mount terminals can be ordered with a QWERTY an ABC or an AZERTY keyboard autopanning in text mode 7035 status screen area displays system information battery gauge RF link status and shift indicators as the application is running vehicle mounts are equipped with a special set of LEDs that act as shift indicators blinking when a key is active and staying on when a key is locked on softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of all terminal screens indicating the function of function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt on the 7035 lt F1 gt to lt F6 gt on vehicle mounts e Two internal PC Card Type II slots one slot is reserved for the terminal radio the extra slot can be used for any PC Card Type II Flash disk adding from
168. differs slightly These differences are highlighted in this section VAN Important Make certain that the appropriate keyboard type F1 to F10 or F1 to FO is selected in the Keyboard Type parameter see Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only on page 130 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 67 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access 3 6 2 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Function Key Access Fl To F10 vehicle mount keyboards have a total of 30 function keys the first ten of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 20 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt FI0 gt The first ten function keys on vehicle mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard That is they are dedicated function keys a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt are the bright yellow keys located along the top of the keyboard e To access lt F1 gt press lt Fl gt e To access lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on through to lt F10 gt Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt FI1 gt To lt F20 gt Each of these function keys is displayed in an orange box in the upper left portion of function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate function key For example e To access lt F11 gt press the
169. dio Specifications Regulatory Information TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE PC Card 802 11 DS SS The IEEE 802 11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards Canada Industry Canada IC This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the specifications listed below following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC ETS 300 826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment ETS 300 328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment USA Federal Communications Commission FCC This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the IEEE 802 11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits Nevertheless the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance Refer to the Regulatory Sta
170. ds If enabled set to Y the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port Data entered in these fields must begin with a SI Prefix and end with a SI Suffix character Exclusive TESS sessions can be configured to receive all serial input even if they are not the currently active session To send data to a single session the Exclusive parameter must be set to Y If more than one session has the Exclusive parameter enabled the session with the largest application number 1 4 receives the serial input The other s do not see any serial input SI Mode TESS supports communication to and from the terminal serial port using two methods Command and Field When SI Mode is set to fiela serial input is displayed in serial input fields and serial output is displayed in serial output fields on the current TESS page The serial input fields are defined in the System Network Controller configuration see 9300 Network Controller User Manual PN 80409 and Teklogix Screen Subsystem TESS Programmer s Manual PN 79186 to review TESS field extended attributes and the bits b command The data is sent to the host as field data Serial output with controller emulations is provided through the passthru printing feature 166 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial If a TSDK Teklogix Software Development Kit is used to develop your application
171. e all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware For details about the Scan See sub menu parameters refer to the Scan See amp Wireless Scan See Scanner User Manual PN 80408 Nomad Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad To interface the terminal to the Nomad scanner Console 2 must be configured for NOMAD For detailed information about configuring the Nomad scanner refer to the LS3070 Wireless Scanner User Manual PN 80416 Test This parameter sends a block of ASCII data out the serial port This function is used during configuration only and has no effect on the emulation 180 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Global Macros 7 11 Global Macros A macro has 19 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys like lt ENTER gt lt DEL gt function keys and arrow keys They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard The methods used to create macros are described in this section 1 11 1 Displaying The Global Macros Menu Macros are programmed from within the Global Macros menu If the Tekterm application is currently active e Press lt ALT gt and type x to exit the Tekterm application The Display Menu appears on the terminal screen m 01 Display Menu A Parame
172. e configuring port for 180 Security 133 serial port labelling 176 Short Code 133 skew 238 specular dead zone 238 suffix character 137 139 symbologies 135 target aiming dot duration 134 techniques 35 37 TESS Scanner parameters 169 Translate bar code 132 trouble shooting tips 36 Type of scanner 130 Verify 133 warning message 33 Scan Result 734 Scan See configuring port for 180 console port settings 176 180 port configuring 180 serial number 150 Scan See settings 180 scan state TRX7370 sc 86 scan state 802 11 SS sc 86 Scan Tone and Scan Time 193 Screen 8255 amp 8260 LCD backlighting 126 Screen parameters ANSI 151 TESS 161 screens Anchor View 173 Columns ANSI 52 Columns TESS 6 Display Shift 174 Field scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 moving between fields 170 Normal scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 Origin scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 page size shape 152 161 positioning 162 PrintScreen Key 157 Rows ANSI 152 Rows TESS 162 Scroll Mode 762 Use Increment 173 X and Y origin 173 X Increment 1 73 Y Increment 773 scrolling Field scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 Normal scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 Origin scroll Refer to Scroll Mode 162 Scroll Mode 762 Scroll Mode 762 Security 194 Allow Teklogix 194 Sup Password changing 194 Tekterm Exit Password 195 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Security 733 security AirFortress E select host CT
173. e 95 insert mode 171 installation antenna 7035 15 antenna 8255 and 8260 22 battery pack 15 16 handstrap 17 pistol grip 17 8255 and 8260 vehicle mounts 78 integrated scanner option 35 Intensity 7035 backlighting 125 Internal internal scanner types 130 Introduction E in unit charger 7942 203 206 Invis characters TESS 164 IP SNMP 191 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual IP addresses bootp requesting 184 Default Gateway Gateway IP address 184 DHCP using 185 DNS using 185 DNS IP 85 Local IP terminal IP address 184 Net Mask subnet mask 184 Network Info 185 Use DHCP 85 Use DNS 185 IrDA Infrared port using 37 ITF Chk D 2 of 5 symbology 45 ITF Chk I 2 of 5 symbology 143 120f5 143 K Kbd Locked 772 keyboard ABC 8255 amp 8260 73 AZERTY 8255 amp 8260 77 compatibility with VT220 ANSI terminal keyboard 104 description of 48 function keys description of 54 lock 172 locking and unlocking keys 52 lock messages 98 low profile vehicle mount 67 One Shot Mode 52 QWERTY 8255 amp 8260 67 sealed vehicle mount 67 36 key 7035 61 44 key 7035 57 56 key 7035 59 Keyboard vehicle mounts 26 Keyboard mode Host Echo 157 Local Echo 157 Newline 1 58 Smart Echo 156 Keyboard parameters ANSI 156 Key Click Duration 2 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Tone 121 Key Click adjusting Tone and Duration 121 key lock function lock
174. e Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners The keyboard side of the termi nal should be on the same side as the tabs e Match the side screw holes on the terminal with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts Screw Holes Ba Quick Release AR Fasteners Figure 2 3 The Terminal Cradle PN 18457 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 2 4 holds the terminal and cradle in place e Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1 4 holes AN Note The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1 4 20 Post Figure 2 4 The Cradle Mounting Plate PN 18197 Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate Next the terminal and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate e Align the tabs on the rear of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down e Slide the fasteners on the front of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate e Warning Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked
175. e See ea oa a a D 17 D 3 4 Power Saving o o e e D 18 DIS CIS DAA ti E eee ah ios D 18 D 4 TRX7410 10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters D 19 DAT Channel s m pp sig heh a ee Hi Bod eS Sw Hees D 19 D4 2 WLAN Timing 204 D 21 D 4 3 Power Saving 2 66 86 68 bb eee eRe eRe D 21 D44 CIS Data ps a ae s maip we a the era eS D 22 Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client Eel Introduction 4 26 4 4 rs ROG ae ope eRe eae E 1 E 2 Loading AirFortress Secure Client Software E 2 E 3 Launching And Setting Up AirFortress Secure Client E 3 E 3 1 Assigning A Password 0000004 E 3 E 3 2 Changing Device Access ID E 3 E 3 3 Turning Encryption On And Off E 4 E 3 4 Resetting Connections o o E 4 E 3 5 Troubleshooting Diagnostics E 5 Appendix F Parameter Trees E1 ParametersMenus 0 0 02000000008 8 F 1 F2 Radio Menus 1 26 06 eredete Sed ee de BOE Sd ws F 8 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual ix PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS These products contains proprietary information of Teklogix Inc as well as the following companies International Business Machines Corporation Phoenix Technologies Limited Datalight Inc Agfa Monotype Corporation and Pacific Softworks Incorporated Software restrictions are as follows and shall be enforced to the fulles
176. e appropriate alpha key to access a macro key 70 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt Q gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt BLUE gt lt W gt and so on 3 6 3 2 FI To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access Fl To F6 vehicle mount keyboards have a total 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt They are displayed in orange print above and to the left of alpha keys lt A gt through lt H gt and lt Z gt through lt N gt You need to press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key to access a macro key For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt A gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt ORANGE gt lt S gt and so on Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 71 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions ABC 8255 8260 Keyboards 3 7 ABC 8255 8260 Keyboards 3 7 1 Accessing Alpha Keys The alpha keys on vehicle mount ABC keyboards are directly accessible a key combination is not required For example to type the letter a e Press the lt A gt key To type the letter b e Press the lt B gt key and so on Creating Uppercase Letters To display an uppercase letter e Press the lt SHIFT gt key before typing an alpha character 3 7
177. e handshake support Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 233 Chapter 9 Specifications Memory Expansion Board 9 5 Memory Expansion Board Type Internal plug in printed circuit module Access Not customer upgradeable Compatibility Proprietary DRAM 8 MB Flash ROM 4 MB 9 6 IrDA Port 7035 Only Function Intended for application download and possible batch data transfer Compatibility IrDA Specification Version 1 1 physical and link layer Supported Transfer Rates All UART rates 2400 bps 115 200 bps Supported Modes UART Async Limitations Shared with serial port COM 1 Only one peripheral active at a time 9 7 Wireless Communication Options Refer to Radio Specifications on page 225 for a description of the radio types available for Teklogix 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals Descriptions also include transmission power data rates and channel information for each radio 9 8 GPS Unit For detailed technical information on the Garmin GPS35 HVS please refer to the Garmin web site www garmin com 234 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 9 Specifications Bar Code Scanning 9 9 Bar Code Scanning Scanner Types Decoded and non decoded Non Decoded Codes Supported Code 39 code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 EAN 128 UPC A UPC E Codabar Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI PLESSY Discrete 2 of 5 Decoded Codes Supported Dependent on external scanner choice Code Discrim
178. e terminal transmits only according to the Xmit Count parameter AN Note Ifthe terminal is not in local edit mode the lt ENTER gt arrow lt CTRL gt and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Wait parameter setting Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 155 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Keyboard Dev Attr This parameter specifies a device attribute string This string can be up to 39 characters long The terminal sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control Whether or not this parameter is set is dependent on the requirements of the host computer Auto Answer This string can be up to 39 characters long and is sent by the terminal as a reply to an ENQ character from the host The Auto Answer string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros For example this string can be used to automatically send the user name and password when logging into the host Refer to String Entry Parameters on page 115 to 116 for detailed information 1 Bit If this parameter is set to Y the terminal transmits 7 bit controls When set to N the terminal transmits 8 bit controls 7 Bit is set to Y by default 1 1 1 5 Keyboard Keyboard Range Echo Mode Smart Smart Local Host DEL Key BS BS DEL PrintScreen key 16 0 26 Insert N Y N Newline N Y N DEC Cursor Keys Cursor Mode Cursor Mode
179. e the cursor between entry fields e The lt ENTER gt key once moves the cursor to the first position in the entry field pressing lt ENTER gt a second time completes the entry field exits the sub menu and returns the cursor to the parent or previous menu e The lt DEL gt key deletes the character to the left of the cursor e The lt CLR gt key lt BLUE gt lt DEL gt clears the entire field If the last character in a field is deleted the previous contents if any reappear 1 11 3 Choosing An ASCII Character AN Important Make sure the lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are turned off By pressing either the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key you can cycle through a set of printable characters not available on the keyboard The sample below is a set of ASCII characters not accessible from the keyboard 1035 lt gt 28 111 2 8255 8260 8 1 3 e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow to display the next character in this sequence and the lt LEFT gt arrow to display the previous one 182 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Adding Additional ASCII Characters 1 11 4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character Normally pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key moves the cursor to the right but in a string entry field pressing
180. eboot rather the terminal enters a power saving suspend mode assuming that a value other than Disabled has been assigned to the power saving parameter Power Down see page 129 When the terminal is turned on from suspend state operation resumes within a few seconds The terminal will emit a few beep sequences while it wakes from suspend state To turn the 7035 off e Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press the lt ENTER ON gt key 24 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals A N Important Ifthe lt BLUE gt key is locked on the terminal will not turn off If the word BLUE is displayed in uppercase characters in the status area at the bottom of the screen this key is locked on If it is locked on press the lt BLUE gt key again to unlock it then press lt BLUE gt lt ENTER ON gt to turn the terminal off 2 4 2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals Turning The 8255s And 8260s On And Off Both types of vehicle mount terminals have on off switches at the back of the unit e Reach around to the back of the terminal toward your right and press the On Off switch I represents on and O represents off 2 5 Resetting Terminals AN Note Regardless of which type of terminal you are using a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit When the terminal is reset it reboots to the
181. echnologies The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user For country specific approvals please consult Radio Certification Sheet Lucent WaveLAN IEEE PC Card Radio part number 80450 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 227 Chapter 9 Specifications 7035 Hand Held Terminal Specifications 9 2 7035 Hand Held Terminal Specifications Physical Size 69 mm 2 73 W x 40 mm 1 60 D 203 mm 8 circumference at keyboard 93 mm 3 68 W x 63 mm 2 50 D x 241 mm 9 5 H max overall without integrated scanner 93 mm 3 68 W x 73 mm 2 90 D x 241 mm 9 5 H max overall with integrated scanner Weight Os Spread Spectrum 633 g 22 3 oz including battery and radio 7035 Narrow Band 763 g 26 9 oz including battery and radio With integrated scanner add 48 g 1 7 oz With pistol grip add 110 g 3 9 oz With hand strap add 17 g 0 6 oz Environmental Standard Temp Hand Helds AN Note For 7035 freezer terminal operating temperatures and instructions refer to 7035 Freezer Terminals on page 38 Operating temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage temperature 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F Relative humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Rain Dust IEC 529 classification IP54 Shock 5 ft drop to concrete 5 times e Warning The battery electrolyte freezes below 30
182. ed In a right justified field the lt DEL gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is opened If the lt DEL gt key is pressed when the field is empty the terminal emits a keyboard error beep The lt DEL gt key does not delete data pre filled by the host applica tion If the lt DEL gt key is pressed in a field that has not been modified the terminal emits a keyboard error beep If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is completed the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Replace mode In a left justified field the lt DEL gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string in this case the lt DEL gt key erases the charac ter to the left of the cursor In a right justified field the lt DEL gt key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor and the cursor is shifted to the right by one posi tion If the lt DEL gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most character position of the field the cursor does not shift to the left when that ch
183. eep Time These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the terminal an advisory a hey you or a bell character Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Error Tone And Error Time These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone And Scan Time Scan tone 1 and Scan time 1 determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2 Scan tone 2 and Scan time 2 determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3 Scan tone 3 and Scan time 3 determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 193 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Security 7 16 Security To change the default supervisory level password the default is 7123456 for the terminal e Position the cursor on the Security parameter and press lt F1 gt Security Range gt Sup Password see text Allow Teklogix Y Y N Tekterm see text 1 i Sup Password At the Sup Password
184. eft Margin Right Margin And Bottom Margin on page 124 for a instructions about setting parameters for autopanning The terminals also support manual panning Refer to Manual Panning Keys Arrow Keys on page 49 for a description of manual panning 2 10 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only 2 10 1 Warnings For your own safety it is critical that you comply with the following warnings 1 Do not look into the laser beam 2 CAUTION Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure 3 CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard 4 This product contains a laser scanner that emits less than 1 0 mW average radiant power at a wavelength of 650 or 680 nm This product complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 1040 11 and DIN EN 60825 July 1993 and is classified as a Class 2 laser product 2 l 2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner Turn the terminal on Wait until the unit has booted to Tekterm or a DOS prompt e Test the scanner by pointing it at a light coloured surface and pressing the scan key or the pistol grip trigger The scanning beam should be energized and the warning indicator shown in Figure 2 6 should be displayed on the terminal screen Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 35 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Operation Of The Integrated Scanner AN Important Ifan aiming
185. ence in a residential installation However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off If the interference stops it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures e Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio Modification to this product not authorized by Cisco could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product TRX7410 8 TRX7410A Teklan 902 MHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum For Vehicle Mount Terminals Only Transmit Power TRX7410 1 Watt TRX7410A 250 mW Frequency Range 902 928 MHz Channels 7 Data Rates 121 kbps TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE PC Card IEEE 802 11 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Transmit Power 32 mW Frequency Range 2 4 GHz 2 5 GHz Channels 11 FCC 13 ETSD 4 FR 1 JP 2 SP Data Rates 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Refer to Regulatory Information TRX7431 WaveLAMJEEE PC Card 802 11 DS SS on page 227 for installation and usage information 226 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 9 Specifications Ra
186. encryption key values e Ifyou enter a hexadecimal value precede it with Ox e Ensure that you enter the same encryption key value on the terminal and on the Access Point with which the terminal will be communicating Depending on the type of Lucent WaveLAN card installed in your terminal Silver or Gold the allowable encryption value varies Allowable values common to both Silver and Gold PC cards are as follows Silver amp Gold PC Card 5 ASCII characters 10 hexadecimal digits add a Ox prefix Values restricted to Gold PC cards only are as follows Gold PC Card Only 13 ASCII characters 26 hexadecimal digits add a Ox prefix TX Key This parameter allows you to specify the encryption key from 1 to 4 that will be used to encrypt transmissions For example if you assign a value of Key 1 is used to encrypt transmissions If you assign a value of 2 Key 2 is used to encrypt transmissions and so on AN Note While all transmissions are encrypted using the key specified in Tx Key the radio will receive traffic encrypted with any of the encryption keys D 4 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios 802 1X 802 1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks using Agere Lucent WaveLAN radios TRX7431 It provides authentication for use
187. ens to identify the function of each softkey Table 2 2 lists the function of the softkeys programmed for the Parameters menus Function Key Softkey Functions lt F1 gt NEXT Displays the next sub menu lt F2 gt PREVIOUS Displays the previous menu DEFAULT Restores all parameters to the factory settings lt F3 gt even after lt F4 gt has been pressed to save the changes made to parameters lt F4 gt SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value Table 2 2 Softkeys For Parameter Menus 2 8 5 The Battery Gauge 7035 Only A horizontal bar graph referred to as a battery gauge is displayed in the status area of the 7035 terminal screen It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100 resolution 10 of nominal The number on the right hand side of the bar graph indicates the maximum capacity of the battery in milliampere hours When the battery capacity is low the battery gauge blinks and the terminal beeps Depending on the type of radio installed and terminal use battery life is typically 9 hours Fast charge time for a Lithium Ion battery is generally 3 5 to 4 hours Refer to The 7967 Gang Charger on page 207 for battery charging details 2 8 6 The Beeper AN Note For instructions on setting beeper duration and frequency refer to the section titled Sound on page 192 The terminal beeper sounds under a variety of conditions Some examples i
188. entered characters In replace mode the lt RIGHT gt and lt LEFT gt arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previ ous or next field Replace mode AN Note When the Enter on Arr parameter is disabled set to N the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys do not complete an entry field See page 170 for details about this parameter Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 95 Chapter 5 TESS Operations lt CLR gt Key Behaviour In TESS 5 5 2 lt CLR gt Key Behaviour In TESS In a left justified field the lt CLR gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field In a right justified field the lt CLR gt key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field If the lt CLR gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Field mode In both left and right justified fields the lt CLR gt key erases charac ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field The cursor remains in the same position in the field If the lt CLR gt key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most Replace mode po
189. eof and iv Prohibit export of the software included in the Cisco Adapter or Driver Software in violation of United States and other national laws 2 Each such license agreement shall also include the following state ments or their equivalents i Except as otherwise expressly provided under this agreement end user shall have no rights in the software included in the Cisco Adapter or Driver Software 11 Software provided under this agreement may contain or be derived from portions of materials provided by a third party under license to licensor LICENSOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF SUCH MATERIALS IN CONNECTION WITH PRODUCT S INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 111 In no event will licensor or its suppliers be liable for consequential incidental or special damages Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual iv The limitation of liabilities described in this section also apply to any third party supplier of materials supplied to licensor The limitations of liabilities of License and its third party supplier are not cumulative Such third party supplier is an intended beneficiary of this section v The software included in the Cisco Adapter and Driver Software was developed at private expense and that if licensed to the US government it is licensed only with restricted rights vi Cisco is
190. er either a scanner or a contact wand to the terminal attach the device to the 28 pin peripheral port at the bottom of the unit Before using the bar code reader you may need to change some parameters For details review Barcode on page 135 8 1 1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader The terminal supports two types of bar code readers contact wands or scanners To use a scanner follow the manufacturer s instructions Use the wand as follows e Hold the wand at less than 30 from the vertical e If there is a switch on the wand turn it on before starting the scan e Keep the tip in contact with the entire label e Move the wand across the label at a steady rate e Begin the scan on an area of the label with a light background and move the wand as if drawing a straight line across the label Centre Line of Wand Bar Code Surface of Wand Figure 8 1 Using A Wand Bar Code Reader If the label is scanned successfully the scanned data appears on the display The terminal will also beep if configured appropriately Occasionally the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read with the wand In this case use the keyboard to enter data from the label Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 199 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories The 7035 Battery 8 2 The 7035 Battery e Warning When a battery is removed from the terminal a backup of the system application an
191. er 7 Setting Parameters Applications 1 1 Applications TESS and ANSI applications require unique names so that several different sessions of TESS and ANSI can operate simultaneously The 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals can support up to 4 sessions at one time Applications Range Name Widget ANS 1 Type 1 Settings 1 Name 4 Type 4 Settings 4 L gt see text TESS ANSI see text AN Important These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing lt F4 gt the SAVE key Name And Type Up to four applications can be entered in this parameter The Name parameter must be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator The Type field indicates the type of session you will be running e Ina Name field type a name that is meaningful to the operator e The available options for the Type field are TESS and ANSI Type the appropriate application type in this field using either uppercase lowercase or a combination e To display the Settings menu for your application position the cursor on Settings and press lt F1 gt the NEXT key AN Note Before you can access the Settings menu you must first complete the Name and Type fields 146 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual C
192. er allows you to determine how the information in the display window moves on the screen The options are Normal Field and Origin If Normal is assigned to this parameter the display window follows the cursor If Field is chosen the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field If Origin is chosen the display window moves to the origin upper left corner after LOCK H or LOCK B messages Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the terminal Storing frequently used page data at the terminal reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions App Parameter The Application parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command Enter zero if this parameter is not used Font Size This parameter is used to change the font size displayed within the TESS applications Font sizes are represented in lines x characters rows x columns Font availability varies depending on the type of terminal used and the font package installed in the terminal e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through the options Cursor Type This parameter allows you to choose how you want the terminal cursor displayed You can choose either an Underline or Blo
193. er is queried for the IP address of Jack teklogix com Ether Packet z This parameter determines the maximum allowable size of the data packet sent from the terminal to the host The possible values are 1500 512 1024 1490 The default value is 1500 AN Note Normally this parameter should be left at the default value of 1500 However if you are using a token ring access point with direct telnet connections the Ether Packet Sz parameter should be set to 1490 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 185 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Network Mobile IP Mobile IP Range Home Agent IP see text Home Agent Disc N Y N Renew Threshld 20 20 300 Rgstr Lifetime 1800 300 65535 Rgstr Tmo Delay 3000 1000 10000 Reg Retry Count 3 1 10 Reg RX Delay Mn 3000 1000 10000 Reg on Contact N Y N Grat Arp Max Ct 3 I 9 Grat Arp RX Dly 2000 200 5000 Simultan Binds N Y N Max Num Binds 1 1 8 Foreign Agents 10 A 32 Home Agent SPI 333 see text Home Agent Key see text Replay Protectn N Y N Home Agent IP The valued entered for this parameter is the IP address of the Home Agent Home Agent Disc Setting this parameter to Y allows the terminal to send a registration packet to the Foreign Agent which in turn forwards the packet to the home network and the Home Agent s The terminal uses the Home Agent s response which includes the Home Agent s IP add
194. er values 117 terminal memory 117 resetting terminals 25 Result Time 34 retransmissions TRX7370 xr 86 retransmissions 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 88 retransmissions 802 IQv2 xr See xr retransmissions 88 retransmissions 802 11 SS xr 86 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Retries 179 Retry Tmo 1 79 reverse video attribute 54 172 Rgstr Lifetime 187 Rgstr Tmo Delay 187 Right Margin auto panning 24 Rjct if Alpha 770 rm received messages TRX7370 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 10v2 87 802 11 SS 86 RMC Recommended minimum specific GPS Transmit data 175 round trip time rt 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 90 round trip time variance of va 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 rows number of in ANSI screen 52 number of in TESS screen 162 Rows ANSI 52 Rows TESS 162 RowStatus 797 rp received polls TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 RS 232 port 6 rt round trip time 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 90 Rx Mode Pwr Saving D 9 Rx Multicasts Pwr Saving D 2 S safety instructions battery charger 7967 7978 amp 7942 211 212 general xxi scanner 35 safety warning scanner 35 SAVE key F3 113 Save key F4 31 55 sc TRX7370 scan state 86 sc 802 11 SS scan state 86 Scan Indic 134 SCAN Key 51 scanner advanced long range ALR 130 236 aiming target dot duration 134 Append Enter 69 Append FO 1769 appending data 134 bar code appending data to 134 Click Data appending data 134 Cli
195. erates properly Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the terminal and the holes on the terminal and pistol grip are aligned Using a Phillips screw driver securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the terminal Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Installing 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals 2 3 Installing 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminals The installation of the vehicle mount terminal depends on the type of vehicle and the application environment A typical installation includes 1 Mounting the terminal 2 Connecting the antenna Installing the power extension 3 AN Note Make certain that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage 2 3 1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal There are two mounting options available 1 Using the horizontal vertical mounting cradle Refer to Figure 2 2 2 Using the cradle PN 18457 and cradle mounting plate PN 18197 AN Note The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1 4 20 18452 Horizontal vertical cradle Ni Figure 2 2 The Horizontal Vertical Mounting Cradle 18 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 2 3 2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Attaching The Terminal And Cradle First the terminal must be attached to the cradle Figure 2 3 To do this
196. erminal for ANSI mode the Name and Type of session in this case ANSI must be specified in the Applications menu This menu is described in the section titled Applications on page 146 Next a unique terminal number must be assigned using the Terminal parameter This number should be unique across the entire system that is each terminal and each application session in each terminal across your system must have a unique number assigned This parameter is described in the section titled ANSI Settings on page 147 When Tekterm is launched the first configured session will appear in the application To display the next session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running e Press lt ALT gt lt F6 gt Each time this key combination is pressed the next session window becomes active To display a specific configured application e Press the lt ALT gt key followed by the application number For example press lt ALT gt 1 to display application number 1 lt ALT gt 2 to display application number 2 and so on 6 2 Sending Data To The Host Teklogix terminals running ANSI transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed The terminal also responds immediately to the device attribute requests CSIc CSIOc and ESCZ AN Note For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI refer to ANSI Settings on page 147 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Ter
197. es Time Date Latitude Longitude Speed knots Direction Magnetic Variation and Mode Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 175 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Ports Serial 1 And Console 2 VIG When VTG is enabled set to Y the Track made good and ground speed sentence can be transmitted from the GPS receiver The data available in a VTG message includes Speed knots Speed kilometers per hour and Direction Tx Period The value assigned to this parameter determines the rate at which the enabled sentences are transmitted For example a value of 10 means that all enabled sentences will be transmitted at the beginning of each 10 second period 7 10 Ports Serial And Console 2 Ports Serial 1 Print Parameters Console 2 Disable Parameters 1 10 1 Serial And Console 2 Peripheral Options The Serial 1 COM1 and Console 2 COM2 options allow you to enable disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports Possible values include Serial 1 Disable Enable Print Scanner Output and IrDA Printer Console 2 Disable Enable Print Scanner Scan See NOMAD and GPS To scroll through the options for each port e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key AN Important Ifyou choose Disable the corresponding port parameters will not take effect These ports operate differently depending on the accessori
198. es m Communities Range gt 1 see text 2 3 4 5 6 190 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The Communities parameter provides a means of limiting access to SNMP managed devices The Communities sub menu allows the network administrator to determine the type of access allowed for each area name and IP address Community Range Community Public see text IP Access Read RowStatus Active All SNMP messages carry a community name which is validated against a locally defined community table to allow certain kinds of access e g Read or Read Write access AN Note The community table is defined in TEKLOGIX GENERIC MIB It can be accessed by SNMP and through the local Parameters menu Community This parameter displays the community name itself IP This parameter identifies the IP address If the Access parameter indicates Read or Read Write a non zero IP address will restrict the source of SNMP commands to be accepted only if they originate from the specified IP address A null IP address can be accessed from any source If the Access parameter has a value of TrapDest the IP specifies the destination IP address for traps Note that more than one trap destination can be configured Access The value assigned to the Acces
199. es an ASCII control character Subsequent alphanumeric keys are presented as they appear on the keyboard CTRL An uppercase CTRL message indicates that the lt CTRL gt key function is locked on All alphanumeric keys pressed generate ASCII control charac ters until the lt CTRL gt key is unlocked Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 29 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only 30 A lowercase alt message indicates the lt ALT gt key will be active until the alt next key is pressed The next key pressed generates an alternate command as defined by the application you are using An uppercase ALT message indicates that the lt ALT gt key function is locked ALT on providing access to alternate commands as defined by the application you are using until the lt ALT gt key is unlocked A lowercase blue message indicates that the lt BLUE gt key is active until the blue next key is pressed Any keyboard option colour coded in blue on the termi nal plastic becomes available An uppercase BLUE message indicates that the lt BLUE gt key function is BLUE locked on Keyboard options coded in blue typeface are available until the lt BLUE gt key is unlocked An uppercase ORANGE message indicates that the lt ORANGE gt key is ORANGE locked on Any keyboard option colour coded in orange on the terminal plastic becomes available A lowercase
200. es selected e Print all TESS print operations are directed to the port All ANSI media copy operations to the primary port are directed to this port e Scanner TESS and ANSI accept scanner input from the port e Scan See TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan See through Console 2 port This option is not available for the Serial 1 port 176 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings e Nomad TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Nomad scanner through Console 2 port This option is not available for the Serial 1 port e Output TESS pass through operations and serial output fields are directed to Serial 1 port This option is not available for the Console 2 port e IrDA Printer A serial peripheral cannot be used while the IrDA port is in use This option is not available for the Console 2 port e GPS TESS accepts input from the GPS receiver through Console 2 port This option is not available for the Serial 1 port 1 10 2 Serial And Console 2 Parameter Settings Since the parameters for the Serial 1 and Console 2 ports are identical in most cases they are discussed in one section Any differences are clearly indicated AN Important The most significant difference between the Serial 1 and Console 2 port parameters is that the Scan See menu is onl
201. ese te OS YS ee 125 7 5 7 1 7035 Backlight Parameters o 125 7 5 7 2 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters 126 TXS ROM SZC s ot a ane eee oe ete aes 127 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 107 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters 19 9 Cursor lV pe sas cena eh ee a ee Le we e A 127 75 10 Palette Remap st oo 4 oa a a ee eS 127 Todd Watchdog Timers s ce gk ae mera eae dee a eS 128 7 5 12 Power 7035 Only o o ee tpi 129 75 13 Serial Numbers 2 aa 4 26 ab do ba wee eee we 129 7 5 14 Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only 130 TO SCAMMED gx oa veh be ewe Sw RO ee we Sea Sd ee ew Bw 130 OL IDE ai Bk ete gag ca a 130 1 06 2 Opuons a ose ERA da weed ee awa dee eee She 131 10 21 Translates a oa a ee ee 132 7 6 2 2 Other Options aose re au a aa a a 20000008 i 133 71 63 Barcode 2 252640 6 eb Re ae pa E pi p Ey OE EE ea 135 10 31 COUTO gk Foor id la Pes ae eee y 135 T032 Code 128 je godin Bae a A 138 0 33 EAN AB o 63 8 Pa blacks amp Oy He bad dt 3 138 1634 BAN Scorza cs Sas Geode eee Baa bes wa 140 103093 UPCA 404485465 24 00 Seo oo Raed we OS 141 16 30 UPCE oa ee ee hee ed de 141 103 Codabat s es rarem oe eb rro e ws 142 1 6 3 8 COdE Ds s bose a a a See we em bh be e oom 142 7 6 3 9 Code ll y aod a ee he eee oy Rey Gees 143 FO SAO TD Ob D 2 pe sole Sak Bue ty A whe e ke 143 1 63 11 MSVPLESSY oe ci Sok bok a OE a 144 16312 D20F5S 4 222455088 Se deb
202. ess the lt BLUE gt key and then press the lt F4 gt key Repeat this key combination until the volume is low enough for your needs To work more efficiently with these keys refer to the note below AN Note To more efficiently adjust the beeper volume lock the lt BLUE gt key on by pressing it twice You can then press the lt F3 gt or lt F4 gt function keys until the beeper volume suits your needs When you have satisfactorily adjusted the beeper volume press the lt BLUE gt key a third time to unlock or turn it off 32 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Beeper Volume The Volume Parameter 2 8 6 2 Beeper Volume The Volume Parameter AN Important When you adjust the volume using this parameter the change is saved to memory To access the Volume parameter e In the Parameters menu position the cursor on the System option and press lt Fl gt e Position the cursor on the Volume parameter and enter a value from 0 to 15 The higher the value the louder the volume e Press lt F4 gt to save the change 2 9 The Display Terminals with liquid crystal displays LCDs are equipped with backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The 7035 and 8260 terminals have LCDs as a standard feature The 8260 is also available with an electroluminescent EL display The 8255 can be ordered with a vacuum fluo
203. et to Y the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left most side of the display Custom Chars r Custom Chars Font Small U 0000 U 0000 This parameter is used to create a list of custom characters to a maximum of 20 characters that are not normally available directly from the keyboard The unicode value of each custom character must be entered rather than the codepage value and a font must be selected to display the characters menu The possible fonts are Small Large and Thai AN Note If the character you select does not exist in the host character set it cannot be sent to the host application Once you ve created this list of characters you can access the list from within a TESS or ANSI session as follows e Press lt ALT gt a to display your list of custom characters e Use the arrow keys to highlight the character you require and press lt ENTER gt to select it Font Override Font Override Font Code 0 is font 18x32 Font Code 1 is font 18x32 Font Code 2 ie x LS ONE 10x26 Font Code 3 sas Ls font 18x32 Font Code 4 is font 8x20 174 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters GPS Global Positioning System Receiver This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer Font Override is enabled set to Y by default and is set
204. ettings and to limit user access itis critical that you change this default supervisory level password immediately Refer to Security on page 194 for details about personalizing your password 112 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Working With Menus 1 3 Working With Menus All terminal parameters are listed in menus The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys are used to move the cursor up and down the current menu The currently selected parameter name is displayed in reverse video To help you work with the parameters and menus a set of pre programmed function keys lt F1 gt through lt F4 gt can be used to move back and forth between menus and save changes made to any parameters There are four types of parameters numeric Y N alpha and string entry In addition some menus have sub menus attached to them This section of the manual describes how to work with all types of parameters and sub menus 1 3 1 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters function keys lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt have been programmed to perform specific actions Table 7 1 describes these function keys in the Parameter Manager Function Key Softkey Function lt F1 gt NEXT Displays the next sub menu lt F2 gt PREV Displays the previous menu DEFLT Restores ALL parameters to default settings even after pressing lt F4 gt
205. eturning any products to the factory call the Customer Services Group for a Return Authorization number Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers In North America these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix Helpdesk The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site For contact information and a listing of worldwide offices please refer to Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date Psion Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in this manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Program License Agreements 00 ee eee eee xi Approvals and Safety Summary ooo xvii Chapter Introduction 1 1 About ThisManual 0 0 0 2 20 00 002002 ee ee 3 L2 TExtConventions se 4 4 3 2 a A eS a BE 4 1 3 About The Terminals s s ecs ats acia e o o 00020002 ae 5 1 3 1 Peatres visos ee ee RE a rs a Ym eS 5 1 3 2 The 7035 Hand Held Terminal 7 1 3 3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers 11 1 3 4 The 8255 Vehicle Mount Terminal LCDorVFD 11 1 3 5 The 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal
206. example ISO and press lt F1 gt to display the character set options e To activate a character set press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to set it to Y 164 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Characters Err Func key This parameter defines the function key that interrupts the normal sequence of a terminal and causes an Error Reply message to be returned to the host Enter the number of the function key to be used as the Error function key e g 1 for function key 1 This parameter should be set to zero unless there is a system requirement for Error Reply messages When the Error function key is entered the terminal abandons all queued procedures and TESS commands and returns an Error Reply message with a milestone to the host The host must respond with a milestone acknowledge before the terminal accepts further TESS commands V Match Chr This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The terminal beeps if the entered data does not match Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character from 0 to 255 that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data Enter O ze
207. eyboard Function Key Access Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt FI1 gt To lt F20 gt Each of these function keys are displayed in an orange box in the upper left corner of function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate function key For example e To access lt F11 gt press lt ORANGE gt and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F12 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing BLUE Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt Each of these function keys is displayed in a blue box in the upper right corner of function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt To access these function keys you ll need to press the lt BLUE gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F10 gt For example e To access lt F21 gt press the lt BLUE gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F22 gt press lt BLUE gt lt F2 gt and so on 3 8 2 2 FI To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access Fl To F6 keyboards have a total of 36 function keys the first six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 30 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt F6 gt The first six function keys on vehicle mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard that is a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F6 gt are the bright yellow keys located in the upper left p
208. fety Summary This safety information is for the protection of both operating and service personnel This equipment complies with Class A Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For sites in Canada Teklogix TRX7431 and TRX7441 802 11b radios require a radio licence unless they are installed totally within a building user shall obtain licence from Industry Canada Use only Teklogix approved peripheral devices and cables RF Exposure REQUIREMENTS For vehicle mount terminals only To satisfy FCC RF exposure require ments for mobile transmitting devices a separation distance of 20 cm or more should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during device operation To ensure compliance operation at closer than this distance is not recommended Do Not OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Operating Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion Do Not Remove Covers Or OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel Do not operate the equipment without t
209. followed by lt ORANGES and then press the lt A gt key e To access lt F20 gt press lt CTRL gt lt ORANGE gt lt B gt and so on Accessing SHIFT Function Keys lt F25 gt To lt F30 gt To access function keys lt F25 gt to lt F30 gt you ll need to press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example to access lt F25 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F1 gt To access lt F26 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt and so on Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 75 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing ABC Macro Keys Accessing SHIFT ORANGE Function Keys lt F31 gt To lt F36 gt Accessing function keys lt F31 gt to lt F36 gt requires that you press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with the lt ORANGE gt key and the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F31 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt and then press lt A gt e To access lt F32 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt lt B gt and so on 3 7 3 Accessing ABC Macro Keys A N Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 8255 and 8260 keyboards offer 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt Depending on whether you are using an FZ to F6 or FI To F10 keyboard accessing these keys differs slightly 3 1 3 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Macro Keys The F1 To F
210. ftkeys see text Video see text Pages This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs The ANSI control functions Next Page NP and Previous page PP are used to select another page These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text scroll off a page the other pages are unaffected AN Important There is no error indication from the terminal if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the terminal Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 151 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Screen Columns This parameter defines the logical page width in characters used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display Rows This parameter defines the logical page length in lines used by the host computer application Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminal s display Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display AN Note The value in this parameter must be an even number Auto Wrap If Auto Wrap is disabled set to N characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the p
211. function keys lt F1 gt through lt F12 gt For example to access function key lt F25 gt e Press the lt SHIFT gt key followed by lt F1 gt To access function key lt F26 gt e Press the lt SHIFT gt key followed by lt F2 gt and so on 3 3 3 Accessing Macro Keys 44 key 7035 terminals are equipped with 4 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M4 gt They are located at the bottom of the keyboard and can be accessed directly that is a key combination is not required Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 58 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 56 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 4 56 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 4 1 Accessing Alpha Characters On 56 key 7035s all alpha characters are directly available on the keyboard a key combination is not required As an example e To access the letter a press the lt A gt key e To access the letter b press the lt B gt key and so on Creating Uppercase Letters To display an uppercase letter e Press the lt SHIFT gt key and then type the alpha character 3 4 2 Accessing Function Keys The 56 key 7035 has 30 function keys the first four lt F1 gt to lt F4 gt are directly accessible in the top row of the keyboard The remaining 26 function keys require a key combination Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt F4
212. fy the encryption key from 1 to 4 that will be used to encrypt transmissions For example if you assign a value of Key 1 is used to encrypt transmissions If you assign a value of 2 Key 2 is used to encrypt transmissions and so on AN Note While all transmissions are encrypted using the key specified in Tx Key the radio will receive traffic encrypted with any of the encryption keys LEAP LEAP is an authentication protocol that is proprietary to Cisco and is designed to operate with Cisco Access Points It is encapsulated in an EAP Extensible Authen tication Protocol packet used in conjunction with the 802 1x standard to authenti cate users at the MAC layer The 802 1x standard does not specify EAP types LEAP also provides the terminal with a new WEP key Each terminal has a unique WEP key to increase the security of the 802 11 radio link When this parameter is set to Y a unique User Name and Password must be assigned for the terminal which the access point uses to forward authentication information to the RADIUS server LEAP User Name Password D 12 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters CIS Data CIS Data Cisco Systems 350 Series Wireless SW 4 25 23 Boot 1 50 00 00 A3 93 EF BO This sub menu displays Card Information Structure CIS data manufacturer
213. g and holding down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key for a minimum of six seconds ESSID The ESSID Extended Service Set Identifier is a string of characters to a maximum of 32 that the terminal uses to determine with which access points 1t can communi cate The terminal will only communicate with access points configured with the same ESSID If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if ANY is entered the terminal will communicate with any available access point Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 1 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios Station The value entered in this parameter to a maximum of 32 characters is used to identify the terminal an 802 11 station for diagnostic purposes AP Density This parameter determines the density of access points in a network The density can be set to one of the following Low Medium or High Data Rate The value entered in this parameter specifies the data rate to be used for message transmission The data rate can be set to one of the following 1Mbit 2Mbit 5 5Mbit or 11 Mbit AN Note Keep in mind that an Access Point or 7035 can only communicate at 11 Mbit if Data Rate is set to Auto Reservation Reservation specifies the medium reservation setting to be used The medium reservation specifies the number of octets in a message or fragment above which a RTS CTS handshake is perfo
214. gin and Right Margin is 2 The value set in the Bottom Margin is 3 This specifies that 2 characters must always be displayed to the left and right of the cursor and 3 lines must always be displayed below the cursor Bottom Margin The contents of the screen will not auto pan or shift until the cursor is moved past the minimum specified in a margin parameter If the cursor is moved past the Left Margin setting the screen pans to the right If the cursor moves past the Right Margin setting the screen pans to the left If the cursor is moved beyond the Bottom Margin setting the screen contents pan up X Increment And Y Increment Manual panning shifting the contents of the screen using the lt BLUE gt key in combination with the lt LEFT gt lt RIGHT gt lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys relies on the values set in X Increment and Y Increment to determine the number of columns spaces and rows lines to pan or shift X Increment determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the lt BLUE gt key is pressed followed by the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow key Y Increment determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the lt BLUE gt key is pressed followed by the lt UP gt or lt DOWN gt arrow key 124 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Backlight 1 5 1 Backlight B
215. gixbrasil com br Email tekbr psion com Chile Psion Teklogix International Inc Avenida Vitacura 2909 Oficina 703 Las Condes Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 334 9344 Fax 56 2 233 3868 Email ventasOpsion com Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual A 3 A 4 Psion Teklogix de Argentina S A Avenida Moreau de Justo 1180 Piso 1 Oficina C 105 Buenos Aires 1107 Argentina Tel 54 11 4343 0193 Fax 54 11 4343 6310 Email tekar psion com Psion Teklogix Espa a S L Cityparc Ronda de Dalt Ctra Hospitalet 147 149 Edificio Atenas 2 3 08940 Cornella de Llobregat Barcelona Espa a Tel 34 9 3475 0220 Fax 349 3475 0230 Email teklogix apdo com Psion Teklogix Africa Postnet Suite 39 Private Bag x11 Halfwayhouse 1685 Ground Floor East Waterfall Edge Phase 2 Waterfall Park Bekker Road MIDRAND 1685 South Africa Tel 27 1 1 805 7440 1 2 Fax 27 11 805 7444 Psion Teklogix Systems India Pvt Ltd M 74 1st Floor M Block Market Greater Kailash ll New Delhi 110048 India Tel 91 11621 9257 Fax 91 11621 9076 Email tekind psion com A 3 WORLD WIDE WEB www psionteklogix com Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Psion Teklogix B V Venrayseweg 57 5928 NZ Venlo Nederlands Tel 0031 77 32400 44 Fax 0031 77 32400 53 D APPENDIX Port Pinouts AND CABLE DIAGRAMS B I 7035 Peripheral Port 1 0 Connector 28 Pin PCR
216. gt To lt F20 gt Each of these function keys is displayed in an orange box in the upper left portion of function keys lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate function key For example e To access lt F11 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the lt F1 gt key e To access lt F12 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing BLUE Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt Each of these function keys is displayed in a blue box in the upper right corner of function keys lt F1 gt to lt 10 gt To access function keys lt F21 gt to lt F30 gt you ll need to press the lt BLUE gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F10 gt For example e To access lt F21 gt press the lt BLUE gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F22 gt press lt BLUE gt lt F2 gt and so on 3 1 2 2 Fl To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access FI To F6 vehicle mount keyboards have a total of 36 function keys the first six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard The remaining 30 require key combinations Accessing Function Keys lt FI gt To lt F6 gt The first six function keys on vehicle mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard That is they are dedicated function keys a key combination is not required lt F1 gt to lt F6 gt are the bright yellow keys located in the upper lef
217. hapter 7 Setting Parameters ANSI Settings 7 1 1 ANSI Settings Ansi Range Auto Term Y see text Terminal 1 1 1024 Host Conn see text Screen see text Host Char Set see text Transmit see text Keyboard see text Serial see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional ANSI information is documented in Chapter 6 ANSI Operations Auto Term AN Note Refer to Group on page 147 for additional instructions When this parameter is set to Y a unique terminal number is assigned for the current ANSI session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored AN Note Auto Term is available when 802 1Qv2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter page 148 or when 802 10v1 is enabled in the Radio Menu 802 10 v1 on page D 6 Group m Auto Term Rang Group 1 1 5 When Auto Term is set to Y the Group parameter is used to identify the group or pool of terminal numbers from which an auto address is chosen Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 147 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Host Conn Terminal For every application session you create the terminal number assigned in the Terminal parameter must be non zero and unique This parameter defines the terminal number for the ANSI session and uniquel
218. have agreed to these license terms Customer may not transfer the software to another party except with Fortress s written permission Customer agrees not to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software Customer shall maintain adequate records matching the use of Software to license grants and shall make the records available to Fortress or the third party developer or owner of the Software on reasonable notice Fortress may terminate any license granted hereunder if Customer breaches any license term Upon termination of the Agreement Customer shall destroy all copies of Software U S Government Customers The Software and associated documentation were developed at private expense and are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 DFAR 252 211 7015 or DFAR 252 227 7014 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 All other technical data including manuals or instructional materials are provided with Limited Rights as defined in DFAR 252 227 7013 a 15 or FAR 52 227 14 a and in Alternative II JUN 1987 of that clause as applicable Export Restrictions Customer acknowledges that the laws and regulations of the United States restrict the export and re export of certain commodities and technical data of United States origin including the Product Software and the Documentation in any medium
219. he Macro Keys Accessing Macro Keys lt M5 gt And lt M6 gt To access lt M5 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt M1 gt To access lt M6 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by lt M2 gt AN Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 65 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions QWERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards 3 6 QWERTY 8255 8260 Keyboards Important 8255 vehicle mounts are available with sealed low profile keyboards The solid rubber membrane covering this keyboard protects the terminal from damage that may result from debris or moisture seeping into the terminal 3 6 1 Accessing Alpha Keys The alpha keys on vehicle mount QWERTY keyboards are directly accessible a key combination is not required For example to type the letter q e Press the lt Q gt key To type the letter w e Press the lt W gt key and so on Creating Uppercase Letters To display an uppercase letter e Press the lt SHIFT gt key before typing an alpha character 3 6 2 Accessing QWERTY Function Keys Keep in mind that vehicle mount terminals are available in two keyboard types Fl to F6 and Fl to F10 see 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards on page 47 for a brief description Depending on which keyboard type you are using accessing function keys
220. he covers and enclosures properly installed Do Not HoLD ANTENNA To avoid discomfort due to the local heating effect of Radio Frequency energy do not touch the antenna when a terminal is transmitting Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual xxi Approvals And Safety Summary Use PROPER FUSE For vehicle mount terminals use only the fuses specified A replacement fuse must meet the type voltage rating and current rating for the fuse it replaces or a fire may result A N Caution Danger of explosion if a 7035 battery is incorrectly handled charged disposed of or replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions described in Maintaining The 7035 Battery on page 42 Carefully review all battery safety issues listed in the section titled Lith ium Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 201 and page 202 VorsICHT Explosiongefahr bei unsachgem fem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers xxii Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual INTRODUCTION 1 1 About ThisManual 0 0 0 0 000000000200000 4 3 1 2 Text Conventions 0 0 0 0 0 000000 ee ee 4 1 3 About The Terminals 0 0 0000 000 000200004 5 Sil Felton os Asc aaa Sieh ee a es ee eh he 5 1 3 2
221. he value assigned to this parameter determines the transmit power level in milli watts Keep in mind that the allowable value may vary from country to country Rx Mode When this parameter is set to Normal the terminal wakes from a sleep or suspend state each time a unicast multicast or broadcast is sent over the network Choosing Unicast or No Multicast limits the terminal to receiving only one or the other of these packet types Pwr Mode The value assigned to this parameter determines the operating method the terminal uses to conserve power The default value CAM Constant Awake Mode keeps the Cisco radio TRX7441 powered up continuously ensuring quicker message response PSP Power Save Mode powers the Cisco radio on and off based on a time algo rithm Packets are retrieved only when the radio is scheduled to be on When the time expires the radio turns off for the required time and then turns back on again to retrieve more data When Pwr Mode is set to FASTPSP the terminal radio switches between PSP mode and CAM depending on network traffic The terminal radio switches to CAM when retrieving a large number of packets and then switches to PSP once the packets have been received Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 9 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7441 802 11b DS SS Radio Parameters Network The value assigned for this parameter Infra or Adhoc configures the radio to operate
222. hed plug into the charger e Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source All front panel LEDs turn on momentarily The Power On LED then remains on indicating a power connection 8 5 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery The 7978 Gang Charger has a Power On LED and each charge pocket has three LEDs Charge Fault and Ready Ensure that the green Power On LED at the front left side of the charger is on The battery charge pockets are moulded making it easy to snap the batteries into the pockets e With the four electrical contacts facing down and textured plastic battery surface facing the front of the charger insert the battery into a charger pocket It should click into place Charging will begin immediately Battery Charged And Ready When the amber Charge LED turns off and the green Ready LED turns on the fast charge cycle is complete and the battery is ready for use Typically a fast charge takes 3 5 to 4 hours Note that for Lithium Ion batteries 70 of the charge occurs within the first hour Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 209 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Fault Conditions 8 5 3 Fault Conditions 8 5 3 1 Red Fault LED Turns On e The battery is not compatible with the charger e The 7035 has set the pack to inhibit the charge In this case the battery is no longer useful and should be returned to Psion Teklogix for prope
223. hen placed vertically and away from metal objects that may interfere with the radio signal The best location for the magnetic mount on a fork lift truck is on the middle of the roof or cab cover at least 20 centimeters away from the operator Warning As a safety precaution USERS ARE NOT PERMITTED TO CHANGE THE ANTENNA 2 3 5 Installing The Cables AN Note Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage When installing the cables between the terminal and other devices consider the following e Ensure the drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage e Protect cables by using grommets when cables pass through metal e Prevent cables and connectors from moving and loosening by using plastic straps 22 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Installing The Extension Power Cable Keep the cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle Leave enough slack on the cables so that the terminal can be removed easily for maintenance 2 3 6 Installing The Extension Power Cable The terminal has a short power cord and connector The extension power cable PN 13985 should be connected from the terminal s power cord to a fused power so
224. ides information about using barcode readers and other accessories such as the AC power adaptor battery chargers and so on Chapter 9 Specifications contains the technical specifications for the terminal radios battery chargers and COM ports Appendix A Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides a phone number and information about support services available at the Mississauga Ontario Canada head office This appendix also lists the offices worldwide Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables Appendix C ASCII Character Table provides a table of ASCII characters Appendix D Radio Parameters describes the parameters for the TRX7370 Narrowband radio the TRX7431 Lucent WaveLAN II IEEE 802 11 PC Card the TRX7441 802 11b Direct Sequence PC card and the TRX7410 TRX7410A 902 SS PC card Appendix E AirFortress Secure Client explains how to install and set up Secure Client software on your terminal Appendix F Parameter Trees provides parameter trees for the 7035 8255 and 8260 terminals 1 2 Text Conventions AN Note Notes highlight additional helpful information VAN Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment e Warning These statements provide critica
225. ies on timeouts Depending on your system assigning a value from 3 the default value to 5 is recommended Reg RX Delay Mn The value assigned for Reg RX Delay Mn determines the minimum delay between registration retransmissions It is measured in milliseconds AN Note While a minimum of at least 1000 milliseconds is required for this param eter the value assigned must not be higher than that assigned to the Restr Tmo Delay parameter Reg On Contact When this parameter is set to Y the terminal will not attempt to register until it receives an advertisement from the Home or Foreign Agent Grat Arp Max Ct The value assigned to this parameter determines the maximum number of sent gratuitous ARPs It is recommended that this value remain at the default of 3 or slightly lower depending on your system Grat Arp RX Dly Grat Arp RX Dly determines the delay in milliseconds between gratuitous ARP retransmissions Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 187 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Network Simultan Binds When this parameter is set to Y it enables multiple simultaneous bindings This means that the terminal can roam back to a Foreign Agent without registering again assuming the old registration has not expired Max Num Binds The value assigned to Max Num Binds represents the maximum number of bindings that the terminal will recognize at one time When determin
226. in either an Ad Hoc Adhoc or Infrastructure Infra network In an Ad Hoc network terminals pass data directly to other terminals an access point is not required In an Infrastructure network terminals must pass data through an access point terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network Channel AN Important The Channel parameter takes effect only when the Network parameter is set to Adhoc The channel number you choose must be the same for all terminals on the network that are set to Adhoc Mixed Cells When this parameter is set to Y the 7035 can communicate with Cisco access points that have encryption set to optional that is whether or not encryption is available the terminal will be able to communicate with a Cisco access point If Mixed Cells is set to N the 7035 can only communicate with Cisco access points that have full encryption enabled AN Note This parameter should be set to N when communicating with a Teklogix 9150 access point Auth Type The value assigned for this parameter determines the type of authentication used Choosing None means no authentication is used If shared key authentication is selected the access point sends a known unen crypted challenge packet to the TRX7441 Cisco radio which then encrypts the packet and sends it back to the access point The access point attempts to decrypt the encrypted packet an
227. ination Automatic for all selected codes Non Decoded input Decoded input is exter nal scanner dependent 9 9 1 Internal Scanners 7035 Only AN Note If you are using a High Performance scanner choose High Vis for the Scanner Type parameter Base Options High performance long range advanced long range and 2 D raster laser scanner Scan Triggering If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the aiming dot will be enabled for a configurable time period after which normal scanning begins Double clicking trigger will override aiming delay and initiate immediate scan 9 9 2 External Scanners Supported Types Decoded and Non Decoded 5V only Interface Via peripheral port Pinout compatible with all 7030 and 8055 scanners 9 9 3 Internal Scanner Port 7035 Only Refer to Table B 4 Internal Scanner Connector in Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams for a detailed connector table Compatibility Symbol SE1200HP SE1200LR SE1200ALR SE2223 2 D Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 235 Chapter 9 Specifications Internal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only 9 10 Internal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only 1035 High Performance 1035 Long Range Parameter SE 1200HP SE 1200LR Light Sonme Visible Laser Diode Visible Laser Diode 675nm 5nm 650nm 5nm CDRH Class II CDRH Class II Laser Class DIN EN 60825 July 1993 Class 2 DIN EN 60825 July 1993 Class 2
228. include None and XON XOFF The function of each mode is as follows Enable Used to input and output data Supports XON XOFF and or CTS RTS or no handshaking Print Used to output data only All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored Supports XON XOFF and or CTS RTS or no handshaking Output Used to output data only All input characters are ignored Supports CTS RTS or no handshaking AN Note To enable the input and or output serial in and or serial out must be enabled in the TESS menu 178 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output The buffer controls how much data the application can send to or receive from a serial device Retries AN Note Retries is not available if Nomad or Scan See is chosen as the peripheral device This parameter determines the number of times the terminal attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded the transmission fails Keep in mind that the value assigned to this parameter must be exceeded before data in the buffer is thrown away To disable this parameter and force the terminal to use Retry Tmo this parameter should be set to 1 Retry Tmo AN Note Retries is not avai
229. ing The Battery oo 205 8 3 6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions 205 8 3 7 Charger Fault Conditions 0 206 8 3 8 Removing The Terminal From The In Unit Charger 206 8 3 9 7942 Charger Specifications 206 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents 8 4 The 7967 Gang Charger rice aeai e aaa aoe ee 207 8 4 1 Connecting The Power Source 207 8 4 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery 207 8 4 3 Fault Conditi0MS 207 8 4 4 7967 Charger Specifications 208 8 5 7978 Gang Charger 2 ooo 209 8 5 1 Connecting The Power Source 209 8 5 2 Inserting And Charging The Battery 209 8 5 3 Fault Conditions s s s sere a e h eg a e 210 8 5 4 7978 Charge Specifications 210 8 6 Important Charger Safety Instructions 211 5 7 Antenna Types s jw ei a oP ee a A A ae 212 8 8 The 7035 PickerCradle o e xaram 2 000000000004 212 8 8 1 Mounting Hardware 0 0 213 5 8 2 Installation s aoea eee ba a0 dea a eo 213 8 8 3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting 213 8 8 4 Mounting The Cradle 215 8 8 5 Installing The Cables 215 8 8 6 Connecting ACable 215 8 8 7 Connecting The Power Source 216 8 8 8 Attaching A Port Replicator
230. ing and unlocking 52 One Shot Mode 52 keys alpha keys ABC keyboard 73 AZERTY keyboard 77 QWERTY keyboard 67 36 key keyboard 7035 61 44 key keyboard 7035 57 56 key keyboard 7035 59 Arrow 49 BLUE and ORANGE 48 CLR DEL 50 CTRL 50 DEL CLR 50 description of general 48 emulation keys IBM 5250 94 encryption Key 1 to Key 4 TRX7431 D 4 encryption Key 1 to Key 4 TRX7441 D 12 error reply 165 ESC 51 function keys ABC keyboard 73 ANSI FK Remap 95 AZERTY keyboard 77 description of 54 QWERTY keyboard 67 36 key keyboard 7035 63 44 key keyboard 7035 57 56 key keyboard 7035 59 Key 1 to Key 4 TRX7431 D 4 Key 1 to Key 4 TRX7441 D 12 locking and unlocking 7035 52 macro keys ABC keyboard 76 AZERTY keyboard 80 description of 55 QWERTY keyboard 70 36 key keyboard 7035 64 44 key keyboard 7035 58 56 key keyboard 7035 60 ORANGE and BLUE 48 SCAN 51 SHIFT 49 Softkeys 35 SPACE 5 TAB 5 TX Key TRX7431 WEP Encryption D 4 TX Key TRX7441 WEP Encryption D 12 unlocking and locking 7035 52 keys locking and unlocking 52 Key 1 to Key 4 encryption D 4 D 12 L labels softkey 153 163 laser beam 35 launching DOS 11 Parameters menu Tekterm 771 LEAP TRX7441 Extensible Authentica tion Protocol D 12 LED picker cradle indicators 2 8 receive 28 transmit 28 7967 Gang Charger 207 7978 Gang Charger 209 Left Margin auto panning 24 LF CR LF character 158 Newline 58 LF CR CTRL J 157 Lithium
231. ing the value for this parameter make certain that the maximum number of base stations that can be simultaneously accessed in the mobile node s terminal s range are represented Foreign Agents The number assigned to this parameter represents the maximum number of Foreign Agents that can be stored locally at one time While normally the value assigned here should be fairly low the default value is 10 it is critical that you set the value high enough so that the terminal always has access to a Foreign Agent and never loses contact with the host Home Agent SPI This parameter represents the Home Agent Security Parameter Index SPI assigned to the terminal s Home Agent In order for a terminal to communicate with a particular Home Agent the value assigned here must match the SPI of the Home Agent The default value is 333 AN Note The minimum acceptable value is 256 Home Agent Key The Home Agent Key is a 16 byte text string that acts as a password In order for the terminal to communicate with the Home A gent the terminal key must match the key assigned to the Home Agent Replay Protectn Setting this parameter to Y enables time stamp based replay protection This prevents outside packets from infiltrating your system The value assigned to the terminal must match the value set at the Home Agent 188 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 802 10 v2 802 10 v2 Port 8888 Chapter 7 Setti
232. ing your thumb and first finger depress the two raised plastic buttons located on the top of the cradle e Pull the plastic carrier forward until a stop is felt to ensure that the locking tabs are fully withdrawn from the plastic cradle e Push the 7035 terminal into the plastic cradle e Push the plastic cradle back snapping it into place To remove the 7035 from the plastic cradle e Reverse the above procedure Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 217 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Picker Cradle LED Indicator 8 8 11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator LED Colour Conditions Green Orange e Cradle is unlocked Green Orange e Cradle is locked e Terminal is ON and battery pack PN 20605 003 is installed e Battery cells are disconnected within the battery pack and the terminal is powered from cradle indefinite usage e Cradle is locked e Terminal is OFF e Battery pack PN 20605 003 is installed e Battery is charging and capacity is less than 80 charged Red e Cradle is locked e Terminal is OFF and battery pack PN 20605 003 is installed Battery not charging because of incorrect data charge fault e Terminal is not inserted in cradle Flashing Green e Cradle is locked e Terminal is OFF e Battery pack PN 20605 003 is installed e Battery is charging and capacity is more than 80 charged The unit is ready for mobile use Note If the terminal is turned on
233. ion Teklogix AB Stora Badhusgatan 18 20 411 21 Gothenburg Sweden Tel 46 31 13 15 50 Fax 46 31 13 57 80 Email info teklogix se NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U S SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Corp 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger Kentucky USA 41018 Tel 1 859 371 6006 Fax 1 859 371 6422 Email salesusa psion com Psion Teklogix Finland Mets nneidonkuja 8 02130 Espoo Finland Tel 358 9 4307 8390 Fax 358 9 4307 8395 Email tekeuro psion com Psion Teklogix Danmark Vesterballevej 4 6 7000 Fredericia Danmark Tel 45 76 24 0133 Fax 45 75 94 4679 Email tedk psion com Psion Teklogix Italia S r l Via Galilei 47 20092 Cinisello Balsamo Milan Italy Tel 39 2 6604 5410 Fax 39 2 6604 5412 Email tkxitalia psion com Psion Teklogix Benelux Nieuwe weg 1 2070 Zwijndrecht Belgium Tel 32 0 3 250 22 00 Fax 32 0 3 250 22 20 Email info psionteklogix be Psion Asia Pacific Pte Ltd 210 South Bridge Road 03 01 Singapore 058759 Tel 65 67358108 Fax 65 67335990 E mail teksing teklogix com Psion Teklogix de Mexico S A de C V Sierra Mojada 626 2 Piso Col Lomas Barrilaco C P 11010 Mexico D F Mexico Tel 52 55 5 327 1124 Fax 52 5 327 1123 Email salesusa psion com Psion Teklogix do Brasil Ltda Al Casa Branca 851 conj 101 e 102 Sao Paulo SP 01408 001 Brasil Tel 55 11 3064 0868 Fax 55 11 3068 8198 WWW www teklo
234. is complete and the battery is ready for use Typically a fast charge takes 3 5 to 4 hours Note that for Lithium Ion batteries 70 of the charge occurs within the first hour 8 4 3 Fault Conditions The red Fault LED turns on to indicate that the battery pack has been rejected or the charge process has failed Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 207 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Fault LED Turns On During A Charge 8 4 3 1 Fault LED Turns On During A Charge The battery temperature has changed such that it is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is halted Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge e The battery is defective for example the battery may have a weak cell an open cell or a short e The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period Clean the battery contacts and try inserting the battery for charging Check the battery parameter performance using the utility provided in the 7035 Try another recharge cycle 8 4 3 2 Fault LED Turns On At Insertion The charger cannot read valid data from the battery Clean the battery contacts and try charging the battery again e Insome cases foreign matter may block the battery receptacle interface Check the charger receptacle for debris and clear if required e The hand held terminal has set the pack to inhibit the charge In this
235. ized and stays on for the PwrON time In cellular mode the radio turns off for twice this period after all channels have been checked and no suitable channel is found This parameter is in units of 1 2 seconds To disable this parameter set it to zero PwrON xmit This parameter determines the amount of time the radio stays on after a transmission waiting for a response from the base station AN Important Ifthe value in the PwrON Xmit is set too low the terminal may miss the response from the base station resulting in a lock up for the user This parameter needs to be set between 2 and 20 depend ing on the response time of the system For example if the host responds slowly the value in this parameter should be set to a higher value D 4 4 CIS Data This sub menu displays Card Information Structure CIS data that is manufac turer information describing the radio installed in your terminal D 22 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX D AIRFORTRESS Secure CLIENT E l Introduction AirFortress Secure Client provides added security to your wireless system encrypting data sent and received by your terminal Keep in mind that this is an optional security package it is not included with standard 7035 software Bar Code Reader using Secure Client eo Laptop using S Access AlrFortreass Paint Secure Client E art AirFortress Wirekes
236. l information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss 4 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction About The Terminals 1 3 About The Terminals The 7035 hand held terminal and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount RF terminals all run DOS and can operate in a Teklogix narrowband or Teklan 902 spread spectrum RF system using the RF connectivity options listed in the Features section below 1 3 1 Features Some features of these terminals include 7035s are equipped with 33 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals are equipped with 66 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache 8 MB RAM can be expanded to 16 MB 4 MB of Flash ROM can be expanded to 8 MB RF connectivity options include IEEE 802 11b 2 4 GHz compliant PC card radios 1 2 and 11 Mbps TRX7431 TRX7441 TRX7370 Narrowband PC card based radios 403 512 MHz 4800 19200 bps TRX7410 TekLan 902 MHz direct sequence spread spectrum radios 7035 terminals can support standard external or optional internal antennas Note that the internal antenna is only available with certain 802 11 radios 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals are shipped with external antennas that are compatible with the operating RF system Rugged sealed enclosure suitable for industrial environments Freezer version available for the 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals and 7035 hand hel
237. lable if Scan See is chosen as the peripheral device This parameter sets the time in seconds that the terminal waits before transmissions stop and data from the transmit buffer is discarded Keep in mind that the value assigned to this parameter must be exceeded before data in the buffer is thrown away A value of 0 zero disables this parameter Input Tmo gn Note Retries is not available if Scan See is chosen as the peripheral device This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the terminal waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 179 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings Scan See Setting The Terminal Console Port For proper communication between a Scan See and a Teklogix terminal the console port of the terminal must be properly configured The parameters for setting up the console port are located in the Ports setup menu under Console 2 in the Parameters sub menu Ports Serial 1 Disable Parameters Console 2 Scan See Parameters The Console 2 parameters described on page 177 should be set as follows Scan See Speed Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Buffer Scan See Test AN Note In order for the terminal to interface to Scan See units with older firmware serial numbers lower than 1594120224 set Parity spac
238. le settings 176 Console 2 settings 176 Data Bits 178 Flow Control 1778 Input tmo 79 Parity 178 Retries 179 Retry Tmo 179 Scan See settings 180 serial settings 176 Serial 1 settings 176 settings 176 Speed 778 Stop Bits 178 TESS Connection Type 6 7035 terminal 9 position of screen 162 power CAM Constant Awake Mode D 9 CPU Speed 729 FASTPSP Fast Power Save Mode D 9 Idle Poll Limit D 18 Power Down 29 Power Off 129 Power Off Time D 8 power save states 240 PSP Power Save Mode D 9 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Pwr Mode D 9 PwrOFF time D 22 PwrOFF Xmit D 22 PwrON time D 2 Rx Mode D 9 Rx Multicasts D 2 Sleep Duration D 3 Tx Power D 9 Watchdog Timer 28 Power Down 7035 129 Power Off 7035 129 Power Off Time D 8 power saving parameters narrow band D 18 Power Down 7035 129 Power Off 7035 129 spread spectrum 902 MHz D 19 Watchdog Timer 28 802 11b direct sequence D 9 802 11 direct sequence D 2 Power up chan D 4 D 19 Prefix Char 37 139 pre regulator 220 PREVIOUS key F2 113 PREV key F2 114 printing pages 99 pass through 177 print screen CTRL P 157 Print Screen Key 57 PrintScreen Key 157 protocol 802 IQ v1 D 6 PSP Power Save Mode D 9 pt poll timeouts TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 49 Pwr Mode Pwr Saving D 9 PwrOFF time D 22 PwrOFF Xmit D 22 PwrON time D 2 Pwr Saving 802 11b DS D 9 Pwr Saving 802
239. les Psion Teklogix S A France January 14 2003 xviii Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary Declaration Of Conformity Product 8255 LCD Vehicle Mount Terminal Application of Council EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive s Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Conformity Declared EN 55022 1998 Class B ETS 300 826 1997 to Standards EN 50082 1 1997 ETS 300 683 1997 EN 61000 4 2 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 3V m 80 1000 MHz EN 61000 4 4 1kV on AC line EN 61000 4 5 AC line 2kV Common 1kV Diff mode EN 61000 4 6 3VRMS 150kHz 80MHz AC line EN 61000 4 11 AC Mains Ports ISO 7637 1 1990 ISO 7637 2 1990 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 A11 Manufacturer PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2100 Meadowvale Blvd Mississauga Ontario Canada LSN 7J9 Year of Manufacture 1999 Manufacturer s Address PSION TEKLOGIX S A in European Community La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France Type of Equipment Data Collecting Equipment Equipment Class Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc Ontario January 17 2003 Legal Representative Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S A France January 17 2003 Teklogix 7035 825
240. level or Psion Teklogix support level password can access and change these parameters 1 4 1 Displaying The Parameters Menu The Parameters application is launched from the start up Display Menu If your terminal is currently in the Tekterm application e Press lt ALT gt and type the letter x The Display Menu appears on your screen m 01 Display Menu J A Parameters B Emulations e DOS Prompt To display the Parameters menu from the startup Display menu e Type the letter a e Type your supervisory level password in the Password window and press lt ENTER gt This is 723456 by default Refer to Security on page 194 for details on changing the default password 118 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Displaying The Parameters Menu Parameters System Scanner Applications View Manager GPS Ports Global Macros Network SNMP Radio Sound ANSI FK Remap Security The Parameters menu is a first level menu that contains parameters for the configuration and customization of a terminal To access sub menus attached to these parameters e Use the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys to position the cursor on the appropriate menu item e Press lt F1 gt the NEXT key to display the sub menu To display the previous menu e Press lt
241. lly returned to a system monitor program running in the background This allows for recovery from programs that crash or hang the terminal If Watchdog Timer is set to Disabled the terminal will not reboot automatically under the circumstances described above 128 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Power 7035 Only 1 5 12 Power 7035 Only Power Range CPU speed 33MHz 8 16 33MHz Power down 4 mins see text Power off 1 hour see text CPU Speed AN Important Changing the CPU speed can invalidate FCC approvals Cisco and Lucent radios are approved for 33Mhz The Narrow Band radio is only approved for 8 MHz This parameter allows you to change the CPU speed your terminal uses Allowable values are 8MHz 16MHz and 33MHz Power Down When the amount of time specified in the Power Down parameter expires without any activity the terminal goes into suspend mode a power saving mode Pressing lt ENTER ON gt reinstates full power mode The possible values for this parameter are Disabled 1 min 2 mins 4 mins 8 mins 16 mins 32 mins and 60 mins Power Off A N Important The value assigned for this parameter is not recognized until the value in the Power Down parameter has expired When the time specified for the Power Off parameter has expired the terminal turns off A full reboot is required to return the terminal t
242. low the next sections of the screen 802 1Q Statistics and Address Info follow the same format as 802 IQv1 statistics Refer to the section titled 802 1Qv1 Radio Statistics Screen beginning on page 87 for a description of the 802 1Qv2 statistics The differences in 802 IQv2 are as follows e AP Controller This replaces AP MAC there is only one 802 1Qv2 network controller The access point the terminal is associated with is not indicated e rt Round trip time is the total time taken to communicate with the controller through the access point and across the network infrastructure and back e Address Info 802 IQv2 always use automatic radio addresses The radio address assigned is displayed here Automatic terminal numbering is optional but all sessions are listed here 4 5 Resetting Radio Statistics To reset the radio statistics to 0 zero e Type the letter z 4 6 Exiting Tekterm To exit Tekterm e Press lt ALT gt and type x When you exit Tekterm the Display Menu described in Launching Tekterm on page 83 appears on the terminal screen 90 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual TESS OPERATIONS 5 1 Configuration lt se ieee weber ee hee RED ee Ree eee 93 5 2 Working With Multiple Sessions o o o oo o e 93 X The Field Types x sad aoe a a be a ee ee he ee a A 93 5 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 0 0 0 000000 0020008 94 5 3 Data Enty atic de a oh
243. lue print above and to the right of alpha keys lt A gt through lt P gt the first row of alpha keys and lt Q gt through lt S gt in the second row of alpha keys Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key to access a macro key For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by alpha key lt A gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt BLUE gt lt Z gt and so on 3 8 3 2 FI To F6 Keyboard Macro Key Access Macro keys on F To F6 keyboards are displayed in orange print above and to the left of alpha keys lt Q gt through lt H gt and lt W gt through lt N gt Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key to access a macro key For example to access lt M1 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by alpha key lt Q gt To access lt M2 gt e Press lt ORANGE gt lt S gt and so on 80 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual TEKTERM 4 1 Introduction 2 46044 844 e484 6589 Hae wee A ee 83 4 2 Launching Tekterm 2 44 ca rior Be Se eh ek a ew A ks 83 4 3 Working With Application Session Windows 0 84 4 4 Radio Statistics Screens e 84 4 4 1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen o oo ee 84 4 4 2 802 11 Radio Statistics Screen 2 2 ee ee es 85 4 4 3 TRX7370 NB amp 802 11 SS Radio Statistics Screen 86 4 4 4 802 IQv1 Radio Statistics Screen 2 ee 87 4 4 5 8
244. minals User Manual 103 Chapter 6 ANSI Operations Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6 3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals Table 6 1 maps the equivalent VT220 keys Teklogix Key Equivalent VT220 Key lt UP gt arrow Up arrow lt DOWN gt arrow Down arrow lt RIGHT gt arrow Right arrow lt LEFT gt arrow Left arrow lt F1 gt lt F4 gt PF1 PF4 lt F5 gt None lt F6 gt lt F10 gt F6 F10 lt F11 gt F11 ESC lt F12 gt F12 BS lt F13 gt F13 LF lt F14 gt F14 lt F15 gt Help lt F16 gt Do lt F17 gt lt F20 gt F17 F20 lt F21 gt Find lt F22 gt Insert Here lt F23 gt Remove lt F24 gt Select lt F25 gt Previous Screen lt F26 gt Next Screen lt F27 gt lt F36 gt None Table 6 1 Teklogix Terminal Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 104 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6 ANSI Operations Working With Sessions 6 4 Working With Sessions AN Important Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the TCP gt prompt 6 4 1 Establishing A New Session e Press lt CTRL gt and type a lowercase a At the TCP gt prompt e Type telin lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address e Press lt ENTER gt e Log in as usual to begin working with the new session 6 4 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To
245. modifier keys that is how these keys are locked on and unlocked Onscreen Indicator shift Description A lowercase shift message indicates that the lt SHIFT gt key will be active until another key is pressed The next numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed displays the punctuation mark associated with that key On 36 and 44 key keyboards if both the lt SHIFT gt and lt ORANGE gt keys are pressed the next letter typed appears in uppercase type Subsequent alpha characters are presented in lowercase type On 56 key keyboards pressing lt SHIFT gt and typing an alpha key produces an uppercase letter lt ORANGE gt key not required SHIFT ctrl An uppercase SHIFT message indicates that the lt SHIFT gt key function has been locked on Any numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed produces the punctuation mark associated with that numeric key until the lt SHIFT gt key is unlocked or turned off On 36 and 44 key keyboards if the locked lt SHIFT gt key is used in con junction with the lt ORANGE gt key all subsequent letters typed appear in uppercase until the lt SHIFT gt key is unlocked On 56 key keyboards locking the lt SHIFT gt key and pressing subsequent alpha keys produces an uppercase letters until the lt SHIFT gt key is unlocked A lowercase ctrl message indicates that the lt CTRL gt key will be active until the next key is pressed The next alphanumeric key pressed generat
246. n Bottom Margin X Increment Y Increment Threshold E On Time Intensity Backlight Font Size Cursor Type Palette Remap Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Brown Lt Gray Dark Gray Lt Blue Lt Green Lt Cyan Lt Red Lt Magenta Yellow White 00 0 DOdONDAaIFWONM O Sodas V OdNDUBR WM O Watchdog Timer Power CPU speed Power down Power off L Serial Number Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus Scanner F 2 Type S Internal External H Options Code 128 Type Include Sym Size Chars Translate In 1 Out 1 in 8 Out 8 Verify Security Short Code Click Time Click Data Scan Result Scan Indic Dot Time Result Time L Barcode Code 39 7 Full Ascii Mode 43 Chk Mod 10 Chk Include Chk AIAG Strip Err Accept Size Chars Field Size Prefix Char Suffix Char Strip Leading Strip Trailing same as 17 Eva Inc Countr Include Ch Size Chars q Prefix Char Suffix Char Ese Seah Addendum tip Trailing EAN 8 Inc Chk Size Chars same as Y Addendum UPCA Inc Num_Sys Include Chi E ize Chars Addendum a o UPC E Exp to UPC A Inc Num Sys Include Chi Size Chars same as Y Addendum Codabar Code 93 Size Chars same as Size Chars same as Code 11 1 Chk Digit 2 Chk Digits Include Chk Size Chars same as
247. n 176 Retries 179 Retry Tmo 79 Scanner option 176 Scan See option 176 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual V Index Vi Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Speed 778 Stop Bits 178 Contact 190 ContNxtField 769 contrast adjusting 33 120 country code 138 CPU Speed 729 cq channel quality displaying 84 85 TRX7370 narrow band 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 CQThresh 92 CR LF LF character 158 Newline 58 CR LF CTRL J 157 cradle See also Picker cradle 212 218 CTRL commands CTRLa 105 CTRL down arrow 94 CTRLf 95 CTRL G Bell 157 CTRL H Backspace 157 CTRL h host select 99 CTRLi 95 CTRL I Tab 157 CTRL J Line Feed 157 CTRL K Vertical Tab 157 CTRLL 183 CTRL L Form Feed 157 CTRL left arrow 94 CTRL P Print Screen 157 CTRL p reprint 99 CTRLr 95 CTRL right arrow 94 CTRL s status displaying continuously 99 CTRL t status display with terminal 99 CTRLu 95 CTRL up arrow 94 CTRL w status display in Lock B 8 H mode 99 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual CTRL Key 50 cursor field advance tab 94 field backspace 94 field exit 94 Field Order 170 home 94 linefeed mode ANSI 157 moving between fields 170 Newline mode ANSI 157 Cursor Type 127 152 162 Custom Chars ASCII characters TESS 174 D data entering 94 171 with a bar code reader 199 transmitting from the terminal 94 155 170 Data Bits 778 Data Rate
248. nal Console 2 L Parameters same as Global Macros T M1 M4 Network Local IP Net Mask Default Gateway H Use DHCP Network Info H Use DNS DNS IP L DNS Domain e Ether Packet Sz t Mobile IP Home Agent IP Home Agent Disc Renew Threshld Rgstr Lifetime Rgstr Tmo Delay Reg Retry Count Reg RX Delay Mn Reg on Contact Grat Arp Max Ct Grat Arp RX Dly Simultan Binds Max Num Binds Foreign Agents Home Agent SPI Home Agent Key Replay Protectn 802 1Q v2 Port F 6 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix F Parameter Trees Parameters Menus SNMP Group Name Contact Name Location SNMP Enable Auth trap Communities 1 E Community Access 6 Batt Thresh RowStatus CQ Thresh Radio Sound Radio parameters are listed by radio type in the pages following Beep tone Beep time Error tone Error time Scan tone 1 Scan time 1 Scan tone 2 Scan time 2 Scan tone 3 Scan time 3 cad Lera ANSI FK Remap F1 1b 4f 50 00 F2 1b 4f 51 00 This menu is displayed only after the A FK Remap parameter is set to Y F29 1b 5b 34 34 F30 1b 5b 34 34 Security Sup Password Allow Teklogix Tekterm 1 Exit Password Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual F 7 Appendix F Parameter Trees Radio Menus F 2 Radio Menus TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 Direct Sequence SS Radio Radio ESSID Station AP
249. nal Scanner Specifications 7035 Only 7035 2 D SE 2223 2 D Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 40 absolute dark light reflectance measured at 650 nm 35 absolute dark light reflectance differential PDF 25 absolute dark light reflectance differential 1 D Symbologies None PDF417 Micro PDF UPC EAN Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 Codabar MSI Plessey RSS and Composite codes Programmable Parameters None Laser On Time Aim Duration Power Mode Trigger Mode Bi directional Redundancy Symbology types lengths Data formatting Serial Param eters Beeper Tone Scan Angle Pattern controls Interfaces Ambient Light Artificial Sunlight 8 pin ZIF connector Industry standard output 450 ft candles 4 844 lux 4 000 ft candles 43 056 lux 12 position ZIF connector Symbol Standard SSI interface with logic level serial data communication plus trigger beeper and decode LED signals 450 ft candles 4 844 lux 8 000 ft candles 86 112 lux with correct enclosure Operating Temperature 22 to 131 F 30 to 55 C 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C 100 duty cycle Storage Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing 5 to 95 noncondensing Power Input Voltage 5 0 VDC 10 5VDC 10 Input Current 72 mA typical 230mA Standby Current 50 uA max 6 5mA Shock
250. nals are equipped with standard keyboard keys along with two colour keys an lt ORANGE gt key and a lt BLUE gt key to allow access to additional keys such as the extended function keys and the lt CLR gt key Some of the most frequently used standard keyboard keys along with the keys accessed using the lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys are described in this section 3 2 1 The Status Area 7035 Only The 7035 terminal has a status area at the bottom of the terminal screen that indicates which mode keys are currently active The key or keys pressed are displayed in lowercase letters at the bottom of the screen For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key it is displayed as ctrl in the status area The status area also indicates whether or not the function of a mode key has been locked on Keys that have been locked on are displayed in the status area in uppercase letters For example if you press the lt CTRL gt key twice to lock it on 1t is displayed as CTRL in the status area Refer to Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only on page 29 and 30 for a description of all possible status area messages 3 2 2 lt ORANGE gt And lt BLUE gt Keys The lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys provide a means of accessing additional keyboard options and characters The functions and characters that are accessed using the lt ORANGE gt or lt BLUE gt keys are colour coded in orange or blue print above the standard keys
251. nals must be used with a rubber boot or vinyl protective carrying case to enhance drop performance below 0 C 32 F 2 12 2 Vehicle Mount Terminals 8255 8260 Standard Temp Low Temp and Freezer vehicle mount terminals are sealed against dust and high pressure water jets to the international standard IP66 8255 8260 Freezer Terminals g Warning 8255 LCD terminals are not available in a low temperature or freezer versions e 8260 LCD vehicle mounts Suitable for use in temperatures ranging from 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F e VFD and EL vehicle mounts Suitable for use in temperatures ranging from 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F 38 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Important Operating Instructions tures as low as 30 C HOWEVER cold starting an 8255 or 8260 Important You can cold start a vehicle mount freezer terminal at tempera freezer terminal at or below 20 C results in a radio warm up period An onscreen message indicates that the terminal is in radio warm up mode and displays the expected radio on tem perature and the actual temperature Designed for condensing freezer and outdoor environments Input power 24 48 VDC 8255 8260 Low Temp Terminals g Warning While low temperature vehicle mount terminals will operate at tem peratures as low as 30 C THEY CANNOT BE COLD STARTED AT TEMPERATURES BELOW 20 C 8
252. nance or cleaning Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 211 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Antenna Types e An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock If an extension cord must be used make sure e The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number size and shape as those on the charger e The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG e Do not expose the charger to rain or snow e Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10 C 50 F Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least two hours e Do not use the charger if after an overnight charge any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel 8 7 Antenna Types External whip antennas include 3 inch 2 4GHz dipole whips and 4 inch UHF whips Antenna Model Type Connector Type Antenna Whip Description Internal Plastic Cap N A N A 2 4 GHz Dipole 7035 SS External Reverse gender SMA PN 20667 Spread Spectrum UHF Whip 7035 NB PN 20668 Narrowband Table 8 2 7035 Antennas E
253. nclude a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected the terminal is unlocked bar code input is accepted or rejected or an operator s entry does not match in a match field The beeper also emulates the function of the PC speaker when running DOS applications Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Beeper Volume lt BLUE gt lt F3 gt And lt F4 gt There are two ways to adjust the beeper volume by pressing the lt BLUE gt key in combination with lt F3 gt and lt F4 gt or by assigning a value in the Volume parameter Both are described in the sections directly following 2 8 6 1 Beeper Volume lt BLUE gt lt F3 gt And lt F4 gt VAN Important When you adjust the beeper volume using the lt BLUE gt lt F3 gt and lt F4 gt key combination the new setting is not saved to memory If the terminal is shut off and powered up again the volume adjustment is lost When you adjust the volume using the Volume parameter the change is saved to memory The beeper volume can be adjusted using the lt BLUE gt key in combination with function keys lt F3 gt and lt F4 gt To increase the beeper volume e Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press the lt F3 gt key Repeat this key combination until the volume is sufficient for your needs To work more efficiently with these keys refer to the note below To decrease the beeper volume e Pr
254. ncrement 773 Y origin 1 73 display contrast adjusting 33 Display menu 711 Display Menu accessing and using 26 DNS using See Use DNS 185 DNS Domain 85 DOS launching and exiting 27 Dot Time 34 double click appending characters to a decoded barcode 134 scanner trigger 133 dropped packets drppkt 85 drppkt dropped packets 85 Duration key click 121 D2of5 144 E EAN UCC Code 128 138 EAN 13 138 EAN8 140 Echo Mode Host echo 157 Local echo 157 Smart echo 156 edit modes TESS 95 EL electroluminescent 231 electroluminescent EL 231 emulation client side 15 emulation keys field advance tab 94 field backspace 94 field exit 94 home 94 tab field advance 94 emulation keys IBM5250 94 enabling disabling Y N parameters 115 encryption AirFortress E encryption keys TRX7431 D 4 TRX7441 D 12 End ANSI 1 59 ENTER key completing a data field 95 CR LF character 158 Enter on Arrows 170 Local Echo mode ANSD 157 Newline mode ANSI 157 Enter On Arr 170 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual VII Index VIII Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal ENTER Pmpt ANSI Telnet Settings 149 Enter To FO 770 entry fields 93 Function keys 171 hidden match 765 video attributes 753 154 171 visible match 165 Entry Mode 171 entry mode 171 Err Accept 136 Err Func key 1 65 error reply message in TESS 165 Error Tone and Error Time 93 ESC Key 51 ESC Prompt ANSI
255. nd 1 62 Replace mode 95 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual XXI Index XXII Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Reverse video attrib 172 Rows 162 running multiple sessions 93 selecting asession 93 settings 159 168 SI FnKey Serial In 68 SI Mode Serial In 66 SI Prefix Serial In 167 SI Suffix Serial In 68 SO Prefix Serial Out 68 SO Suffix Serial Out 68 Terminal 60 Underline video attrib 172 video attributes 17 802 10 connection 60 9010t connection 1 60 TESS Settings character attributes 163 character sets choosing 164 Connection Type Telnet amp TCP Direct 160 Features parameters 172 Fields parameters 170 Scanner parameters 169 screen settings 767 serial parameters 166 test parameters 168 Test key repeats 123 Test parameters for TESS Settings 168 Threshold 7035 backlight 125 timeout 902 Wlan D 2 timeouts beacon bt 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 timeouts poll pt TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 Timing parameters D 17 D 18 Tone key click 121 transient suppressor 220 Translate bar code 132 transmit TX key TRX7431 D 4 TRX7441 D 12 transmit failures xe TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 Transmit parameters ANSI 155 transmitted acknowledgements xa 802 1Qv1 88 802 10v2 88 transmitted initialized messages xi TRX7370 86 802 IQv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 802 11 SS 86 transmitted messages xm
256. ndard Code 128 138 Start and End ANSI 159 start up menu Station TRX7431 D 2 Station TRX7441 D 8 statistics radio 84 statistics radio resetting 90 statistics screen spread spectrum radio 802 11 86 TRX7370 narrow band radio 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 89 802 11 radio 85 802 11 spread spectrum radio 86 status displaying continuously 99 status displaying in Lock B amp Lock H mode 99 status displaying terminal 99 Stop Bits 178 string entry parameters 1 15 116 182 adding special characters to 116 cycling through special characters 716 key function description 715 Strip Leading 137 139 Strip Trailing 37 139 sub menus accessing 114 subnet mask Net Mask 84 Suffix Char 137 139 Sup Password 794 support services 3 A Switch Speed D 5 symbologies IATA 2 0f5 145 symbologies bar code 1 35 displaying type of bar code 134 Sync Delay D 17 SysName 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 System menu 1 20 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal System Name See SysName 88 T tab CTRL D 157 tab vertical CTRL K 157 TAB Key 51 target dot duration of 134 TCP Direct connection 148 160 TekLan TRX7410 226 D 19 TekLan TRX7410A 226 D 19 TekLan 902 MHz DS SS TRX7410 226 D 19 TekLan 902 MHz DS SS TRX7410A 226 D 19 Tekterm exiting 90 launching 83 radio statistics resetting 90 radio statistics screen displaying 84 statistics radio 84 statistics radio resetting 90
257. nde n SEE BATTERY COMPARTMENT FOR MANUFACTURING DATA A Laser Radiation Warning Label TERLOGIX 20605 LITHIUM ION RECHARGEABLE BATTERY 7 2 V 1350mAh ASSEMBLED IN JAPAN Y RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF y PROPERLY 1 N WARNING BURN HAZARD DO NOT INCINERATE OR HEAT ABOVE 100 C 212F DO NOT DISASSEMBLE NOT FOR USE BELOW 20 C 4F 20597A B Lithium Ion Battery Warning Label This label is affixed to the underside of the battery Tit i TexLOGIX Made in Mississauga Ont Canada EDECEM EI EA U S PAT 4 758 717 Model 7035 Handheld Ref No MI Manufactured Fe C Model Serial Number Label This label lists the following e Serial Number e Reference Number This field contains a numeric code used to identify the country code the temperature range of the terminal and so on e Manufactured This field contains the terminal s date of manufacture Figure 1 5 Safety Labels 10 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers 1 3 3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers The integrated scanner used in the 7035 may be covered by one or more of the following U S patents 4 360 798 4 369 361 4 387 297 4 460 120 4 496 831 4 593 186 4 603 262 4 607 156 4 652 750 4 673 805 4 736 095 4 758 717 4 816 660 4 845 350 4 896 026 4 897 532 4 923 281 4 933 538 4 992 717 5 015 833 5 017 765 5 021 641 5 029 1
258. nes battery capacity based on the operating temperature 1 Temperature Battery Capac 30 C 22 F 35 20 C F 45 10 C 14 F 60 0 C 32 F close to 80 40 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation For Vehicle Mount Terminals Only 2 12 3 3 For Vehicle Mount Terminals Only e 8260 LCD freezer vehicle mount terminals have a delay programmed into the software to prevent the display backlight from turning on if the internal temperature sensor is below 10 C The duration of the delay is between one and two minutes depending on the temperature measured by the sensor This delay is required to heat up the backlight tube preventing damage during cold temperature start up Although the terminal is operational during this time it is extremely difficult to read the display until the back light is turned on g Warning Do not install a non heated keyboard in an 8260 freezer terminal Conversely do not install a heated keyboard in a standard tempera ture 8260 terminal g Warning Do not install the terminal in such a way that the power cable is bent 90 at the terminal Doing so may cause damage to the power cable and power cable strain relief e To prevent condensation when a vehicle mount freezer terminal is moved from a freezer to a warmer environment it is recommended that the termi nal power be left on for at least five minutes
259. ng And Exiting The Parameters Menu To launch the Parameters menu from the startup Display menu e Type the letter a At this point you ll be asked to enter a password either a supervisory or Teklogix level password To exit the Parameters menu and return to the Display menu e Press lt F2 gt the PREVIOUS key until the Display Menu is visible 26 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Launching And Exiting Tekterm 2 6 1 3 Launching And Exiting Tekterm Normally the Tekterm application an emulation is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on If the Display Menu is on your screen e Type the letter b to launch Tekterm To exit Tekterm and return to the Display Menu e Press lt ALT gt and type the letter x 2 6 1 4 Launching And Exiting DOS To launch DOS from the Display Menu e Type the letter c At this point you ll be asked to enter a password either a supervisory or Teklogix level password To exit DOS and return to the Display Menu e Type start at the DOS prompt Press lt ENTER gt and then press lt ESC gt immediately To exit DOS and return to the Emulations screen e Type start at the DOS prompt and press lt ENTER gt 2 1 The Keyboard Teklogix offers a variety of keyboards for the 7035 hand held and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals All keybo
260. ng Parameters see text Range gt SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Port Port specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2 The default value is 8888 Keep in mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller AN Note When using 80210 v2 make certain that the terminal Net Mask matches the network controller net mask 1 13 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Group Name see text Contact see text Name see text Location see text SNMP Enable Y Y N Auth trap Y Y N Communities see text Batt Thresh 0 0 100 CQ Thresh 0 0 100 Range 3 A amp L Note The SNMP menu for non IP terminals does not include IP specific menu items For this type of terminal the SNMP menu displays only the follow ing parameters Group Name Contact Name Location and Batt Thresh Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP IP network providing they support SNMP SNMP uses Management Information Bases MIBs that define the variables SNMP can access Each product has a defined set of MIBs that determine how SNMP operates the type of access allowed and so on All Teklogix products support the TEKLOGIX GENERIC MIB a MIB that defines some common features across Teklogix products All devices also support MIB II a management informa
261. nge Invis 42 0 255 NULL 46 0 255 Char Set see text Err Func Key 0 0 255 V Match Chr 0 0 255 H Match Chr 0 0 255 Upper Case N Y N Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 163 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Characters Invis In TESS applications some fields may be set as invisible or non display fields This parameter determines the character that will mask the actual text typed For example this feature is often used in password entry fields where the actual text typed is replaced by asterisks asterisk The ASCII equivalent for this character is 42 NULL This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields Note that positions containing spaces are not considered empty Enter the ASCII equivalent of this character The most commonly used characters are _ underline The ASCII equivalent for this character is 95 period The ASCII equivalent for this character is 46 Char Set Char Set ISO N IBM Y DEC N Misc N This menu contains the character sets available with your Teklogix terminal The Y or N displayed next to a character set indicates whether or not a character set has been activated within this group For example in the sample menu above Y next to IBM indicates that a character set has been activated in this group To choose a character set e Position the cursor on the appropriate item for
262. nge is 25 to 150 1 5 3 One Shot Mode One Shot Mode Range Orange Key Lock see text Blue Key 1 Shot Lock see text Alt Key 1 Shot Lock see text Shift Key 1 Shot Lock see text Ctrl Key 1 Shot Lock see text The One Shot menu allows you to configure the behaviour of the modifier keys listed The available options are Lock 1 Shot and 1 Shot Lock Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 121 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Typematic Rpt Lock When the Lock option is selected the modifier key is locked on after being pressed only once The key remains on until it is pressed a second time to turn it off AN Note When a modifier key is locked on it is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen Shot When 1 Shot is selected the modifier key remains on only until the next key is pressed AN Note A modifier key cannot be locked on when 1 Shot is selected Shot Lock When 1 Shot Lock is selected and a modifier key is pressed once the modifier key remains on only until the next key is pressed If the modifier key is pressed twice it remains locked on or active until it is pressed a third time to turn it off AN Note When a modifier key is locked on itis displayed in uppercase letters in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen Otherwise it is dis pla
263. nserted in the charger it is automatically switched off The 7942 In Unit Charger is a single site fast charger This unit can charge Lithium Ion or Nickel Metal Hydride batteries AN Note To ensure that air flow through the base of the charger is unimpeded the charger should be placed on a hard flat surface free of possible obstructions 8 3 1 Mounting Bracket The optional mounting bracket allows the 7942 charger to be permanently secured to a table or bench permitting one handed removal of the 7035 terminal from the unit Charging temperature is restricted to from 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 203 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Connecting The Power Source To attach the mounting bracket e Remove the two rubber feet closest to the front of the charger Retain the screws e Secure the mounting bracket to the charger using the screws removed from the rubber feet e Use two 8 wood screws to secure the bracket to the appropriate surface 8 3 2 Connecting The Power Source e Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger e Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source When the charger is plugged in all the LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self test The Power LED then remains on indicating a power connection 8 3 3 In Unit Charger LED Indicators LED Indicator Definition P
264. nt Size on page 152 TESS Font Sizes are described under Font Size on page 162 AN Important Because the 8260 vehicle mount terminal is equipped with a full size 25 x 80 display full screens can easily be displayed without reducing the font size For this reason the 8260 does not provide a Font menu This parameter is used to change the font size displayed on 7035 hand helds and 8255 vehicle mounts Font sizes are represented in lines x characters rows x columns Font availability varies depending on the type of terminal e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through the options 1 5 9 Cursor Type AN Note This Cursor Type parameter is used by the DOS command line or by applications that do not provide cursor adjustment parameters Tekterm is equipped with its own cursor commands This parameter allows you to choose how you want the terminal cursor displayed You can choose either an Underline or Block cursor e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through and choose an option 7 5 10 Palette Remap A DOS based application generally uses a VGA colour palette On Teklogix terminals these colours are converted to grey scale with varying degrees of success While grey scale displays well on a 7035 hand held terminal it does not display as well on an 8255 LCD or an 8260 vehicle mount terminal The Palette Remap parameter allows you to substitute default application colours with colours
265. o Y the screen is open for function keys only and the cursor is not positioned When this parameter is disabled the screen is open for data entry and the cursor is placed in the first field if it exists Video Video Range Normal BOLD see text Bold NONE see text Faint BOLD see text Blink BLNK see text Reverse REV see text Underline ULIN see text Normal The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Normal ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Bold The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Bold ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse Or Underline Faint This option allows you to adjust the intensity on the screen and is set to Bold by default The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Faint ANSI attribute that is Normal Bold Faint Blink Reverse or Underline Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 171 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Features Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the Blink ANSI attribute that is Normal
266. o lt M10 gt lt ORANGE gt lt Z gt A Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 60 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 36 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 5 36 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 5 1 Accessing Alpha Characters On 36 key 7035s all alpha characters are printed on the terminal plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys To access an alpha character you must first press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you want to type is printed AN Important Keep in mind that when you press the lt ORANGE gt key only once it is locked on by default You need to press the lt ORANGE gt key a second time to unlock or turn it off Refer to Key Lock Func tion on page 52 for a complete description of this function Because the alpha keys on a 36 key keyboard are laid out much like the letters on a telephone generally in groups of three letters per numeric key you need to take a few extra steps to access the alphabetic characters The examples below help illustrate how to access alpha characters Choosing A Single Alpha Character The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in orange characters above the numeric key lt 1 gt one To choose the letter a To choose the letter b T
267. o Login N Y N FK Remap N Y N 9010t Settings Range gt Host see text Port 9999 0 9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format H HH HHH HHH or a host name if DNS is used Port Port specifies the 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet port number The default 9010t port number assigned is 9999 the maximum allowable value The default Telnet port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767 ENTER Pmpt This string indicates that the terminal is waiting for the user to press lt ENTER gt at the time of connection ESC Prompt This string indicates that the user can press the lt ESC gt key to terminate a connection attempt before the connection is established Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 149 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Host Conn Auto Login Auto Login Range Login Prompt gin see text Login see text Password Prompt word see text Password see text Password Echo Y Y N Login Failed incorrect see text The Auto Login parameters are used to define whether or not the terminal will attempt to log in automatically The Auto Login sequence is as follows 1 Na Pod 8 Host sends Login Prompt Terminal responds with Login Host sends Password Prompt Terminal responds with Password Host may send password echo Terminal ignores password echo
268. o choose the letter c AN Note Press the lt ORANGE gt key and press numeric key lt 1 gt Press the lt ORANGE gt key and press lt 1 gt twice Press the lt ORANGE gt key and press lt 1 gt three times Once you ve typed an alpha character or characters remember to turn the lt ORANGE gt key off by pressing it a second time This will end alpha selection Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 61 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing Alpha Characters Creating Uppercase Letters To display a capital letter e Press the lt ORANGE gt key and then the lt SHIFT gt key before typing the alpha character Choosing More Than One Alpha Character From The Same Key If you need to choose more than one alpha character from a single key you ll need to press the Accept key between alpha selections The Accept key is presented as a double arrow lt gt above the 0 zero key Pressing this key signals the terminal to display the alpha character you ve chosen and await the next selection from the same key For example suppose you want to type the letters a b and c These letters are all accessible from the numeric key lt 1 gt To type the letter a e Press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the numeric key lt 1 gt e Press the Accept key lt gt to indicate that the letter a should be accepted and that ano
269. o full operating mode The allowable values for this parameter are Disabled 1 min 8 mins 16 mins 32 mins 1 hour 2 hours and 4 hours This timeout occurs whether the terminal is turned on or off That is even if the terminal is switched off it will return to its last operating state when switched on If it is left off for the time period specified by this parameter a full reboot will occur when switched back on 7 5 13 Serial Number This parameter identifies the terminal serial number Normally this value is set at the factory However the serial number can also be defined in the field using a serial download cable and a terminal connection to PMENU AN Note Serial Number is saved in EEPROM it will not be erased if the parameter values are defaulted Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 129 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only 7 5 14 Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only Teklogix offers two types of vehicle mount keyboard types an FI To F6 and an Fl to F10 keyboard type The keys on these two keyboard are mapped differently and the Keyboard Type parameter allows you to specify the keyboard type your terminal is using F1 To F6 or F1 to F10 AN Note The value assigned to this parameter is saved until you change it that is it will not change when the lt F3 gt Default key is pressed 1 6 Scanner Scanner Type
270. o the left of the cursor e lt CLR gt key combination lt BLUE gt lt DEL gt clears the entire field Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 115 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys 1 3 6 1 Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys AN Important Make sure the lt CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt keys are turned off By pressing either the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard The ASCII sets differ slightly depending on the type of terminal you re using 1035 lt gt 8 1 11 2 8255 8260 8 1 e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow to display the next character in this sequence and the lt LEFT gt arrow to display the previous one 1 3 6 2 Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character Normally pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key moves the cursor to the right but in a string entry field pressing the lt RIGHT gt arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead If you ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right To add another ASCII character in the string entry field next to the one you ve already ch
271. ode to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code e Check that the bar code is within the proper range see page 239 e Does the terminal display the warning without scanning This suggests a hardware problem in the 7035 The terminal can be configured to enable a function such as lt ENTER gt by pressing the trigger twice within a time period which is measured in milliseconds See Click Time on page 133 for more details This function is independent of the aiming dot override described earlier in this section under Operation Of The Integrated Scanner on page 35 and only applies after a successful scan 2 10 3 Scanning Techniques The Scanner Angle e Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode Scan Symbol Variations e Scan the entire symbol The scan beam must cross every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol e Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes e Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together 2 11 Infrared IrDA Port 7035 Only The IrDA port is the small red window at the top of the 7035 This port can transmit an infrared signal to printer equipped with an IrDA adapt
272. onditions An internal charger fault is indicated if e The Fault LED remains illuminated after the terminal is removed e All LEDs turn on and remain illuminated when the charger is powered up e All LEDs turn on during normal operation Power should be cycled to the charger to correct these problems If any of these symptoms occur persistently the charger unit should be repaired by a qualified service technician 8 3 8 Removing The Terminal From The In Unit Charger To remove the terminal from the charger e Apply steady downward pressure to the front of the charger with one hand while pulling up on the terminal If necessary you may need to use a gentle side to side rocking motion to slide the terminal out of the charger well 8 3 9 7942 Charger Specifications Charge Sites 1 site for in unit charging and a battery adaptor insert for this in unit charger that allows a battery to be charged without the terminal Charge Time 3 5 to 4 hours Compatibility Lithium Ion Li Ion Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH Connection Via contacts at base of battery pack battery must be installed in terminal Charge Operation Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention Indicators display charge status Lifetime Minimum 5000 pack insertions typical 10 000 insertions Reliability Self cleaning contacts Power Supply Autoranging 100 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 206 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual
273. oosing An ASCII Character o o e 182 7 11 4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters o o 183 7 11 5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros 183 1 12 NEtWOIK lt 0er Aa Ke eee wo 184 7 13 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 189 TAA RAdIO es ds a aia do 192 TAS Sound o s cer A e eee Ee EG 192 7 15 1 Vehicle Mount Sound Parameter Values 192 7 15 2 7035 Hand Held Sound Parameter Values 193 LLO SECUTI son oe da aa e e ad Bde da e a 194 TAGA Sup Password e a a a RSE Ra as 194 7 16 2 Allow Teklogix oce cernere ee 194 7 16 3 Tekterm Exit Password 2 2 2 ee ee 195 7 17 ANSIFK Remap gt i eataa 24de642o0 4246 Hab 4 G0 woe 195 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 109 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Using The Parameter Manager AN Important Ifyou are uncertain how to operate your terminal keyboard refer to Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions beginning on page 45 7 1 Using The Parameter Manager g Warning Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties Generally parameters are configured for each site during installation The Parameter Manager provides access to the parameter menus The values assigned to the parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication
274. or The maximum distance between IrDA devices is 18 inches AN Important The IrDA port is connected to the COMI serial port UART A serial peripheral connected to COMI cannot be used while the IrDA port is active Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 37 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Low Temperature Freezer and Outdoor Terminals 2 12 Low Temperature Freezer and Outdoor Terminals Teklogix has developed a range of hand held and vehicle mount terminals that can withstand low temperatures outdoor use and or freezer applications Each terminal s capabilities along with a list of operating guidelines is provided in this document 2 12 1 Hand Held Terminals 7035 Freezer Terminals AN Important A 7035 freezer terminal will cold start if left in a freezer HOWEVER you may experience long delays while the internal heater warms the liquid crystal display to a temperature that can provide an acceptable refresh rate In cases where the 7035 freezer terminal is left to freeze in an environment below 20 C 4 F and the battery has less than a 30 charge remaining the terminal may not power up properly IN ORDER TO AVOID THESE ISSUES we recommend that the 7035 freezer terminal be stored and powered up at temperatures above 0 C 32 F e For use in temperatures ranging from 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F e Water sealed to IP 54 to withstand rain and condensing environments e 7035 termi
275. orrect length The rear bracket of the cradle also has four through holes that allow the cradle to be attached directly to a surface Prior to mounting the plastic cradle must be removed To disassemble the cradle e Unscrew the two hex bolts one per side and pull away the plastic cradle Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 213 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting The diagram below includes the disassembly of the pedestal mount Figure 8 2 Disassembling The Cradle For Mounting 214 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Mounting The Cradle dd Mounting The Cradle Mount the main chassis using four 48 32 machine screws and four 8 32 KEPS nuts AN Note If mounting directly to wood use four 8 wood screws Replace the plastic cradle securing it with two hex bolts one per side e Ifa pedestal mount is used adjust the angle of the cradle to the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws 8 8 5 Installing The Cables Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices consider the following e Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage e Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal e Use plastic straps to prevent cables and connectors from loosening e Keep cable
276. ors 29 RESET Press Enter 93 Scan Indication 734 scanner warning message 36 134 Scan Result 34 messages retransmitting TRX7370 xr 86 messages retransmitting 802 IQv1 xr See xr retransmissions 88 messages retransmitting 802 1Qv2 xr See xr retransmissions 88 messages retransmitting 802 11 SS xr 86 messages received rm TRX7370 86 802 IQv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 messages transmitted xm TRX7370 86 802 I1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 Mixed AIAG 169 Mixed Cells D 10 Mobile IP 86 Mod 10 Chk 136 145 Mod 10 Chk D 2 of 5 symbology 144 Mod 10 Chk 12 of 5 symbology 143 Mod 43 Chk 1 36 mounting cradle for 8255 terminal 78 20 for 8260 terminal 2 22 moving the display 162 173 MSI Plessy 144 multiple ANSI sessions 146 applications 146 TESS sessions 93 146 N Name 90 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal narrow band TRX7370 radio parameters D 13 D 18 narrow band radio TRX7370 225 D 13 Net Mask 1 54 Network Adhoc or Infra D 3 D 10 Network addresses 184 bootp requesting 184 Default Gateway Gateway IP address 184 DHCP requesting 185 DNS using 185 DNS Domain 785 Employ Bootp 184 Ether Packet Sz 185 Local IP terminal IP address 184 Net Mask subnet mask 54 Network Info 785 Use DHCP 85 Use DNS 1 85 Network Info 785 Newline 758 Newline 758 Next ch auto Channel Auto D 20 NEXT key F1 113 Nomad console port settings 177 180
277. ortion of the keyboard e To access function lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt F7 gt To lt FI2 gt These function keys are colour coded in orange print just above and to the left of the first six alpha keys on the keyboard A Z E R T and Y Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key 78 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access For example e To access lt F7 gt press lt ORANGE gt and then press lt A gt e To access lt F8 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt Z gt and so on Accessing CTRL Function Keys lt FI3 gt To lt FI8 gt To access these function keys you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example e To access lt F13 gt press the lt CTRL gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F14 gt press lt CTRL gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing CTRL ORANGE Function Keys lt FI9 gt To lt F24 gt To access lt F19 gt to lt F24 gt you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key followed by the lt ORANGE gt key and then the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F19 gt press lt CTRL gt followed by lt ORANGE gt and then press l
278. osen e Type a numeric character for example type the number 7 e Next press the lt DEL gt key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters and select another character 1 3 6 3 Entering Information In A String Entry Field In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter you can also type text in a string entry field e Type the required text in the string entry field including letters numbers and symbols e Press lt ENTER gt to save the text 116 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Saving Changes To Parameters 1 3 7 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered the new value must be saved To do this e Press lt F4 gt the SAVE function key If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved a dialog box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes 1 3 8 Resetting The Terminal AN Note Regardless of the type of terminal you are using a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit When the terminal is reset it reboots to the Tekterm application and parameter changes take effect 1 3 8 1 Resetting The 7035 To reset a 7035 e Press and hold down the lt BLUE gt key and the lt ENTER ON gt key for a
279. ower Green e Always on when the charger is plugged in e On during charge process e Off once battery is fully charged e Blinking if a battery charge fails Charge Yellow e On solid when battery is rejected See Battery Charge Fault Conditions on page 205 and Charger Fault Conditions on page 206 for details Ready Green e On when charge is completed successfully Table 8 1 Charger LEDs 8 3 4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger The 7942 Charger has a Power LED along with three additional LEDs Ready Charge and Fault Ensure that the green Power LED at the front of the charger is on The in unit battery charge pocket is moulded making it easy to slide the terminal into the charger well Fault Red e Grasp the terminal just below the display with the keyboard facing you and slide the lower portion of the terminal with battery into the charger e Apply steady gentle downward pressure to properly mate the charger connector with the battery in the terminal 204 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Charging The Battery 8 3 5 Charging The Battery When the terminal with battery is inserted in the charger all LEDs light up After a few seconds the Ready and Fault LEDs turn off The Charge LED remains on indicating the fast charge is in progress The Power LED should always
280. p 6 ANS Operations Configuration exorcista ee RS 103 gt Sending Data To The Host oaaae a 103 6 3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 104 6 4 Working With Sessions aao ee eee 105 6 4 1 Establishing A New Session oaoa aaa 105 6 4 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions 105 6 4 3 Closing A Session se sacrae wek e a aaa a E e a 106 6 4 4 Printing A Screen co teres ressrsbere rei 106 6 4 5 Smart Echo Disabling 106 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters 7 1 Using The Parameter Manager 111 7 2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu 111 7 3 Working With Menus 200004 113 iv Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents 7 3 1 Softkey Function Keys o o 113 7 3 2 Displaying Sub Menus 0 4 114 7 3 3 Numeric Parameters e s eeso aa eaea nunaa a 114 7 3 4 Y N Parameters oscoro cceurs 000000004 115 73 5 Alpha Parameters 2 040 044 0042 4 dee oe eae ea 115 7 3 6 String Entry Parameters o 115 7 3 7 Saving Changes To Parameters o 117 7 3 8 Resetting The Terminal 117 7 3 9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values 117 7 4 Terminal ParametersS s lt o a msa nia o e e e 118 7 4 1 Displaying The Parameters Menu 118 AS A ot Be Bee ae eG ae 120 7 5 1 Volume And Contrast gt e gt
281. p L Note On vehicle mount terminals without a dedicated lt ESC gt key the lt ORANGE gt key is used to access this function The lt TAB gt Key a In a TESS application pressing the lt TAB gt key moves the cursor into the next field to the right In an ANSI application pressing the lt TAB gt key transmits a TAB character to the host AN Note Vehicle mount terminals are not equipped with a dedicated lt TAB gt key The lt ORANGE gt key is used to access this function The lt SPACE gt Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters The lt SCAN gt Key 7035 Only Pressing the lt SCAN gt key the yellow key with the star burst scan symbol on it activates the scanner beam It is situated in the top centre of the keyboard for easy right or left handed access Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 51 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Key Lock Function 3 2 4 Key Lock Function The lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt lt CTRL gt lt ORANGE gt and lt BLUE gt keys have a lock function that allows the function of these keys to be locked on until you unlock or turn them off 3 2 4 1 The 7035 Hand Held Key Lock Function Refer to One Shot Mode on page 121 to learn how to define the lock and unlock behaviour of the 7035 modifier keys On 7035 hand held terminals an onscreen message is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area at
282. parameter is set to Y the user is prompted to enter a password before being allowed to exit the Tekterm application 1 47 ANS FK Remap ANSI FK Remap Range r 1 lb 4f 50 00 see text F 2 lb 4f 51 00 F 3 lb 4f 52 00 F28 lb 5b 34 32 F29 lb 5b 34 33 F30 lb 5b 34 34 In ANSI each function key lt F1 gt to lt F36 gt has a default string associated with it When a function key is pressed the corresponding default string is sent to the host The ANSI FK Remap table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined The remapped string length is limited to a maximum of 7 AN Important This menu is available only after the FK Remap parameter see FK Remap on page 151 is set to Y Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 195 TERMINAL ACCESSORIES 8 1 External Bar Code Readers scce eoe asoga waos aoan a a dacia Was 199 8 1 1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader 199 8 2 The 7035 Battery ss gee ee he He Ewe RE he ee Dee es 200 8 2 1 Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions 201 8 2 2 Lithium Ion Battery Pack Specifications 202 8 3 The 7942 In Unit Charger 2 ee 203 8 3 1 Mounting Bracket a aeea ate a a a d aa aba a a e a 203 8 3 2 Connecting The Power Source sen oora caaea 204 8 3 3 In Unit Charger LED Indicators
283. r NB Radio Address D 3 cellular mode D 22 ch TRX7370 operating channel 86 802 11 SS operating channel 86 changing softkey labels 153 163 Channel D 4 D 19 Channel 802 11 DS radio D 3 D 10 Channel Auto Next ch auto D 20 Channel Enable D 5 D 20 channel quality cq displaying 84 85 TRX7370 narrow band 86 802 1Qv1 87 802 1Qv2 87 802 11 SS 86 channels Narrow Band Channel D 14 Channel Enable D 5 D 20 Manual Table D 6 Power up chan D 4 switching using Manual Table D 6 Switch Speed D 5 channels 902 spread spectrum Channel D 9 Channel Auto Next ch auto D 20 Channel Enable D 20 Next ch auto Channel Auto D 20 Power up chan D 9 Character parameters TESS 163 characters appending to bar codes 137 139 ASCII table C Char Set choosing TESS 164 Custom Chars ASCII characters TESS 174 cycling through 116 182 Host Char Set choosing ANSI 154 Invis TESS 164 Lower ANSI 154 NULL TESS 164 prefix 137 139 stripping 137 139 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal suffix 137 139 Upper ANSI 154 character sets choosing in ANSI 154 choosing in TESS 164 Lower ANSI 1 54 Upper ANSI 154 charger charge ready indicator 205 charge time 205 failed charge 7942 205 failed charge 7967 207 full recharge 205 gang charger 7967 207 208 gang charger 7978 209 211 in unit charger 7942 203 206 mounting bracket 7942 203 safety instructions 7967 7978
284. r devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless To activate 802 1X authentication e Set 802 1X to Y e Press lt F1 gt to display the 802 1X sub menu Stored User ID When Stored User ID is set to Y the User Name and Password assigned in this parameter sub menu are used for 802 1 X authentication If Stored User ID is disabled you will be prompted to enter a user name and password when the terminal is powered up 802 1X Range gt Stored User ID Y see text User Name And Password The Name and Password assigned at this sub menu are used by the access points and RADIUS server on the network to authenticate the packets sent from your terminal Stored User ID Range User Name see text Password see text e Enter a unique user name and password in the string entry fields A Important If 802 1X is enabled authentication will operate only if the access points and RADIUS server on your network are configured for EAP MD authentication For 9150 configuration information refer to the 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual PN 80440 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 5 Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios 802 10 vl AN Note If you are using AirFortress Secure Client software 802 10v1 parame ters are not available When 802 10 v1 is
285. r disposal The addresses are listed under Lithium Ion Battery Disposal Precautions on page 11 e The battery is defective For example the battery may have a weak cell an open cell or a short e The charger cannot read valid data from the battery Clean the battery con tacts and try charging the battery again 8 5 3 2 Red Fault LED Blinks e The battery temperature is higher than the acceptable range and the fast charge is inhibited Remove the battery and permit it to cool to room tem perature before reinserting and restarting the charge 8 5 3 3 Yellow Charge LED Blinks Low Temperature Standby The amber Charge LED will blink when the battery temperature is below the acceptable range and the fast charge is inhibited The battery will automatically commence charging when the battery temperature comes with in the acceptable range AN Note Ifthe battery does not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period clean the battery contacts and try inserting the battery again In some cases foreign matter may prevent the battery contacts from properly connecting in the battery receptacle Check the charger receptacle for debris and clean if required 8 5 4 7978 Charge e Charge Sites Compatibility ea batteries only Connection Via contacts at top of battery pack 210 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Important Charger Safety Instructions Cha
286. r in a field is erased the field remains empty i e any pre filled data is not displayed Pressing the lt DEL gt key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep The lt DEL gt key can delete data pre filled by the host application If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is com pleted the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted Fcursor mode Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt DEL gt key operates in exactly the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode 5 6 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the terminal receives a reply A locked state is indicated by either LOCK B base or LOCK H host in the lower left corner of the display When the reply is received by the terminal the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again 98 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 5 TESS Operations Control Commands 5 7 Control Commands A group of lt CTRL gt key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the terminal will operate under a variety of conditions lt CTRL gt p Reprints the last print page sent from the host This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the terminal l
287. rameter name as it appears on the terminal panning auto and manual parameters 123 124 parameters Alpha parameters 1 5 main menu displaying 118 numeric 1 4 saving changes to 117 string entry 115 116 182 Y N boolean 115 Parameters menu launching and exiting 26 parameter trees E Parity 178 PASSTHRU command 177 Password ANSI Telnet Settings 150 password changing security 194 Password Echo ANSI Telnet Settings 151 Password Prompt ANSI Telnet Settings 150 PC card specifications for 226 peripheral serial port 9 peripheral port I O connector 199 peripherals defining serial connections 176 picker cradle 2 2 cable connecting 2 5 disassembling before mounting 2 3 installation 2 3 installing cable 2 5 LED indicators 218 maintenance 2 6 mounting 2 5 port replicator attaching 21 6 powered 10 55 VDC model 7937C 212 powered 11 16 VDC model 7937B 212 power source connecting 2 6 specifications 218 unpowered model 7937A 2 2 pinouts B pistol grip installing on 7035 17 pitch scanning 238 pmenu displaying 118 XIV Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual polls received rp TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 Poll Timeout D 7 poll timeouts pt TRX7370 86 802 11 SS 86 Poll Timing parameters D 17 D 18 Port ANSI Telnet Settings 149 Port TESS Connection Type 161 Port 802 IQ v2 189 port pinouts B port replicator picker cradle 21 6 ports ANSI Connection Type 149 Buffer 1 79 conso
288. rent line CTRL G Bell The terminal beeps CTRL H Backspace The cursor moves back one space CTRL I Tab The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop CTRL J Line Feed wae CTRL L Form Feed The cursor moves down one line in the same column CTRL K Vertical Tab The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set DEL This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position Table 7 2 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines which character is sent to the host DEL delete or BS backspace The host interprets how it will respond to the code The selection made at this parameter does not affect how the lt DEL gt key operates at the terminal PrintScreen Key This parameter determines the hot key that will print the screen contents through the terminal serial port The default is 16 or lt CTRL gt P AN Note The terminal s serial port must be set for Print Refer to Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options on page 176 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 157 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial Insert When this parameter is enabled set to Y the keyboard operates in insert mode In insert mode the graphic symbol of a graphic character or a control function for which graphical representation is required is inserted at the cursor If the
289. rescent display VFD or a LCD If the ambient light is low the backlight will turn on after a key is pressed after a scanner decode or after data is received from the host The backlight will remain on for a configurable duration Refer to Backlight on page 125 for details about specifying how long the backlight will remain on 2 9 1 Adjusting The Display Contrast AN Note Contrast can only be adjusted on terminals with liquid crystal displays There are two ways to adjust the contrast by pressing the lt BLUE gt key in combination with lt F1 gt and lt F2 gt or by assigning a contrast value at the Contrast parameter Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 33 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Contrast Adjustment lt BLUE gt lt F1 gt And lt F2 gt 2 9 1 1 Contrast Adjustment lt BLUE gt lt FI gt And lt F2 gt The LCD liquid crystal display contrast is adjustable using the lt BLUE gt key and function keys lt F1 gt and lt F2 gt AN Important When you adjust the screen contrast using the lt BLUE gt lt F1 gt and lt F2 gt key combination the new setting is not saved to memory If the terminal is shut off and powered up again the contrast adjustment is lost If you adjust the contrast using the Contrast parameter the change is saved to memory To darken the display Press the lt BLUE gt key and then press lt F1 gt Repeat this key combination until
290. ress to choose the Home Agent with which it will register Renew Threshld The value assigned to this parameter indicates the number of seconds prior to Regstr Lifetime expiration that the terminal attempts a registration renewal If for example this parameter is set to 20 the terminal will attempt to renew registration 20 seconds before Regstr Lifetime expires When setting this parameter keep in mind that if the value is too low the session will expire and the terminal will be unable to communicate with the host On the other hand if the value is too high the terminal will attempt to register continually 186 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Network Rgstr Lifetime The value assigned to this parameter indicates the maximum registration lifetime in seconds that a terminal will be registered with the Home Agent The default value for Rgstr Lifetime is 1800 The value 65535 is equivalent to infinite If the terminal requests a value larger than the value configured for the Home Agent the registration will be rejected and the terminal will retry using a lower value Rgstr Tmo Delay The registration timeout delay is measured in milliseconds Values lower than the protocol s absolute minimum for registrations retransmissions one second will be rejected Reg Retry Count The value entered for this parameter indicates the maximum number of registration retr
291. reviously displayed characters If Auto Wrap is enabled set to Y the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin Disp Ctrls This parameter is used to debug information from the ANSI host Instead of acting on the ANSI CO and C1 controls a character description of them is displayed on the terminal screen Font Size This parameter is used to change the font size displayed within the ANSI application on 7035 hand helds and 8255 and 8260 vehicle mounts Font sizes are represented in lines x characters rows x columns Font availability varies depending on the type of terminal used and the font package installed in the terminal e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through the options Cursor Type This parameter allows you to choose how you want the terminal cursor displayed You can choose either an Underline or Block cursor e Press the lt RIGHT gt arrow key to scroll through and choose an option 152 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Screen Softkeys AN Note This menu uses string entry fields For detailed information about com pleting this type of field refer to String Entry Parameters on page 115 Softkeys F1 F2 F3 F4 AN Important The sample menu above reflects the 7035 hand held softkey options The Softkey menu for 8255 and 8260 vehi
292. rge Operation Charging occurs automatically at insertion without user intervention Indicators display charge status Limitations Will not charge NiMH batteries However if a NiMH battery is inserted in this charger neither the battery nor the charger will be damaged Important Charger Safety Instructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery charger Model 7967 and 7942 Before using the battery charger read all instructions and cautionary markings on 1 battery charger 2 battery and 3 product using battery Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger pull the plug rather than the cord Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow been dropped or otherwise damaged in any way it should be inspected by qualified service personnel Do not disassemble the charger it should be repaired by qualified service personnel Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any mainte
293. rging 205 conditioning 42 description of 43 full recharge 206 gauge bar graph 31 42 installing 16 Lithium Ion safety precautions 200 maintaining 42 removing 15 safety precautions Lithium Ion 20 time full charge 206 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Ill Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal battery See also battery pack 200 Batt Thresh 792 beacons received rb 802 IQv1 87 802 IQv2 87 beacon timeouts bt 802 IQv1 88 802 IQv12 88 Beam Lockout 770 beeper adjusting volume 32 adjusting volume using Volume parameter 33 description of beep conditions 37 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 32 Beep Tone and Beep Time 93 bell CTRL G 157 Bit 7 ANSI Transmit 156 blinking video attribute 154 172 BLUE and ORANGE keys how to use 48 bold video attribute 154 171 bootnum 802 1Qv1 displaying 87 802 1Qv2 displaying 87 boot number See bootnum 87 Bootp request for See Employ Bootp 154 Bottom Margin auto panning 24 bt beacon timeouts 802 1Qv1 88 802 1Qv2 88 Buffer 179 bytes received inbyte 85 bytes sent outbyte 85 C cable diagrams B cables extension power cables installing 23 installing for 8255 and 8260 22 CAM Constant Awake Mode D 9 capacity of battery 3 42 Caps Lock On 123 Card Information Structure CIS D 13 D 18 D 22 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Card Information Structure CIS TRX7431 D 7 Cellula
294. rmed to reserve the medium for the message or fragment transmission Setting this parameter to the maximum allowable value 2347 disables medium reservation Pwr Saving When this parameter is enabled set to Y the radio operates in power saving mode utilizing the parameters listed in this sub menu Pwr Saving Range gt RX Multicasts N Y N Sleep Duration 100 1 65535 Rx Multicasts When this parameter is set to Y the terminal wakes from a sleep or suspend state each time a multicast a broadcast sent to multiple recipients from a single packet is sent over the network Rx Multicast should be left disabled set to N D 2 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D Radio Parameters TRX7431 WaveLAN IEEE 802 11 DS SS Radios Sleep Duration The value assigned for this parameter determines how many milliseconds must pass before the terminal enters a full power state from a suspend state in order to check for messages If there are no messages the terminal returns to suspend state AN Important Ifthe value assigned to this parameter is set at too high you risk missing messages sent over the network Network The value assigned for this parameter Infra or Adhoc configures the radio to operate in either an Ad Hoc Adhoc or Infrastructure Infra network In an Ad Hoc network terminals pass data directly to other terminals
295. ro to disable this feature AN Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host Field matching allows the host to pre load data into an entry field that is compared with the user s input The terminal beeps 1f the entered data does not match Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character from 0 to 255 that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data Enter 0 zero to disable this feature AN Note Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream Upper Case When this parameter is set to Y lowercase input is converted to uppercase Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 165 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial 7 1 2 4 Serial Serial Range In N Y N Exclusive Y Y N SI Mode Field Field Command SI Prefix 10 0 255 SI Suffix 13 0 255 SI Fnkey N see text Out BA Y N SO Prefix 10 0 255 SO Suffix 13 0 255 AN Note This menu uses string entry parameters For detailed information about entering data in this type of parameter refer to String Entry Parameters on page 115 In This parameter enables the serial port input fiel
296. rrently operating The acceptable values for this parameter range from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 AN Note Setting the Default Gateway to 0 0 0 0 disables this feature A communication link will not exist between sub networks 184 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Network Use DHCP m Use DHCP Range gt Network Info DCHP Local When Use DHCP is set to Y the IP address and subnet mask are always taken from the DHCP server The sub menu attached to this parameter offers two options DHCP or Local If Network Info is set to DHCP the DNS server IP the DNS suffix Domain and the default gateway will also come from the DHCP server If Network Info is set to Local these values will be taken from the locally configured terminal values AN Note If Use DHCP is set to Y the IP Address parameter see page 184 should be left blank Use DNS Use DNS Range DNS IP DNS Domain Setting Use DNS Domain Name System to Y allows access to your DNS server The options in the sub menu DNS IP and DNS Domain allow you to specify the IP address and domain name of your DNS server The DNS domain is appended to any host name that does not include a suffix For example if your applications menu includes the server name Jack and the DNS Domain is teklogix com the DNS serv
297. rtant The Auto Pan feature is modified using the parameters in this menu Keep in mind however that Auto Pan is used by the DOS command line or by applications that do not provide auto panning e g the Parameters menus Tekterm is equipped with its own panning capabilities and does not execute panning as described in this section Panning Rang Auto pan y Y N Left margin 5 0 25 Right margin 1 0 25 Bottom margin 1 0 20 X increment 1 0 25 Y increment dl 0 25 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 123 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Panning Auto Pan Left Margin Right Margin And Bottom Margin AN Note The X increment and Y increment parameters are used for manual panning only Auto panning relies on the values set in the Left margin Right margin and Bottom margin parameters Auto Pan is used to enable and disable auto panning When it is enabled set to Y the values set in the Left Margin Right Margin and Bottom Margin are used to determine the number of characters that will always be visible to the left and right of the cursor and the number of lines that will always be visible below the cursor If the cursor moves beyond the value specified the entire contents of the screen are panned or shifted to comply with the values set in the margin parameters Example The value set in the Left Mar
298. s parameter determines the use of the community row Read indicates that this community name provides read only access to the variables Read Write means this community name can both read and write variables Trap Dest indicates that this community row is only used to define a trap destination Note that IP must also be set for these rows to be effective RowStatus RowStatus specifies the status of this row of the table The allowable values include Active and Not InService A row configured using the Parameters menu should always be set to Active Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 191 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Radio Batt Thresh AN Note This parameter is only available when the Teklogix security password is entered at startup Allow Teklogix must be set to Y see page 194 The SNMP agent periodically polls the battery level and compares the level to the value assigned as the low battery threshold Batt Thresh If the battery level is lower than the value assigned to the Batt Thresh parameter a trap is sent only once until the battery level increases presumably when the battery has been replaced This parameter is set to 0 zero by default CQ Thresh AN Note This parameter is only available when the Teklogix security password is entered at startup Allow Teklogix must be set to Y see page 194 The SNMP agent polls the channel quality on a
299. s away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle e Leave enough extra cable so that the terminal can be easily removed A amp L Note Where applicable ensure that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage 8 8 6 Connecting A Cable When a picker cradle is ordered with a peripheral cable e Connect one end of the cable to the accessory e Connect the other end to the 7035 itself e Secure the cable to avoid physical injury or damage to the cable Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 215 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Connecting The Power Source 8 8 7 Connecting The Power Source Model 7937A does not require a power connection Model 7937B and 7937C have short power cords and connectors The extension power cable PN 13985 joins the cradles to a power source If an unfused power source must be used install the fuse assembly PN 19440 provided with PN 13985 To connect the fuse assembly e Push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive red lead of the power cable e Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery g Warning Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the specified range Note also that the fuse should be
300. s transmitted after the Input Tmo value in the Ports Serial 1 menu has expired If the serial data is received in bursts and the Input Tmo value expires between bursts the serial data may be transmitted in several packets If prefix and suffix values are used for SI data the Input Tmo value will not affect the transmission of the data from the terminal Serial data is passed to the TESS session after the Serial 1 port Input Tmo value has expired and or the prefix and suffix characters are received SI Prefix This parameter determines the start of message character on serial input A value of 0 zero indicates no prefix Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Tests SI Suffix This parameter determines the end of message character on serial input A value of 0 zero indicates no suffix Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from O to 255 to represent the end character 1 FnKey SI FnKey Range I FnKey 0 0 36 This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the serial input For example entering a value of 1 appends lt F1 gt to serial input A value of 0 zero appends lt F0 gt the lt ENTER gt key To disable this feature so that a suffix is not added set the SI Fnkey p
301. scanner 236 2 D SE2223 scanner 130 36 key keyboard alpha keys accessing 6 function keys accessing 63 macro keys accessing 64 uppercase letters creating 62 36 key 7035 61 44 key keyboard 57 alpha keys accessing 37 function keys accessing 57 macro keys accessing 58 uppercase letters creating 57 5250 emulation keys 94 56 key keyboard alpha keys accessing 59 function keys accessing 59 macro keys accessing 60 uppercase letters creating 59 XXIV Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 7 Bit 156 7000 LED Version parameter settings 180 7000M LCD Version parameter settings 180 7035 picker cradle See also Picker Cradle 212 219 7035 terminal antenna attaching 15 approvals 230 battery installing 75 display 229 hand strap attaching 17 pistol grip attaching 17 ports 9 specifications 228 36 key keyboard 67 44 key keyboard 57 56 key keyboard 59 7937A unpowered picker cradle 2 2 7937B powered picker cradle 11 16 VDC 212 7937C powered picker cradle 10 55 VDC 212 7942 in unit charger 203 206 7967 battery charger 207 208 7978 battery charger 209 21 7978 gang charger 209 211 802 IQ connection ANSI 1 48 802 IQ connection TESS 60 802 IQ v1 protocol Auto Radio Addr D 6 802 IQ v2 189 802 11b DS specifications for 225 802 11b DS SS parameters for D 8 8255 ABC keyboard 73 antenna attaching 22 approvals 232 AZERTY keyboard 77 cables installing 22 display LCD 232 VFD 231 extension power
302. screens pressing lt ALT gt lt F6 gt does not immediately display the 802 IQv2 radio statistics screen Follow the steps below to display this radio screen e Press lt ALT gt lt F6 gt to display the Telnet statistics screen e Press lt ORANGE gt lt N gt Next to display the 9010t statistics screen e Press lt N gt once again to display the 802 IQv2 statistics screen If the lt ORANGE gt key is locked on remember to press the it a second time to deactivate it 802 10v2 Statistics CQ 100 inpkts IUSZO outpkts 1223 inbytes 3798828 outbytes 126790 inerrs 12758 outers 0 droppkt 0 802 10 Statis AP Controller MAC 00 A0 C9 AD 99 70 bootnum 7737 CQ 100 rm 219 xm 212 rb 783 xi 2 ra 214 xa 226 bt 2 X 0 rE 710 va 137 Address Info Radio Address 1024 Tnum 33 TESS Tnum 15 ANSI MAC ADDR 00 60 1D 04 C0 96 Serial NO 346323 SysName lt the system name gt GroupName lt the group name gt Telnet And 9010t Radio Statistics Telnet or 901 0t statistics are displayed in the top portion of the 802 IQv2 screen These statistics are identical to the 802 11 radio statistics and are described in the section titled 802 11 Radio Statistics Screen on page 85 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 89 Chapter 4 Tekterm Resetting Radio Statistics 802 1Qv2 Radio Statistics With only a few differences outlined be
303. send output RS 232D Serial 26 CTS1 Clear to send input RS 232D Port 27 SERIAL1_TX Serial transmit data RS 232D COM1 28 SERIALI_ RX Serial receive data RS 232D B 2 8255 60 Peripheral Port 1 0 Connector 28 Pin PCR Function Pin Signal Name Description 1 GND Digital ground Ground 2 GND Digital ground 3 MIC Microphone input Audio 4 LINE_OUT Line level audio output Alarm 5 BEEP External beeper output EMI Shield 6 SHIELD Digital ground Input If grounded at power up causes Diagnos 7 DIAG terminal to enter diagnostic mode Menu tic Mode allows flash ROM upgrade and other test modes Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255 60 Peripheral Port I O Connector 28 Pin PCR Function Pin Signal Name Description 8 SCNR ENABLE a enable to initiate external scan Non 9 SCNR_ACK n oa Scanner 10 SCNR_TRIG Scanner trigger input 11 SCNR_DATA Scanner undecoded serial data input 12 SCNR_SOS Not used Serial 13 SERIAL2_RXD Serial data input RS 232D aan a 14 SERIAL2_TXD Serial data output RS 232D a 15 12V Unswitched 12V DC 500 mA fuse 16 12V Unswitched 12VDC 500 mA fuse Scanner 17 12V_SCAN_PWR 12 V switched scanner power Power 18 5V_SCAN_PWR 5 V switched scanner power 19 NC NC 20 CV_OUT Control voltage output 21
304. sion has the Exclusive parameter enabled the session with the largest application number 1 4 receives the serial input The other s do not see any serial input Start End The start character is added to the beginning of the data received from the serial async port The end character is added to the end of the data received 1 1 2 TESS Settings TESS Range Auto Term Y see text Terminal 1 see text Host Conn see text Screen see text Characters see text Serial see text Tests see text Scanner see text Fields see text Features see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters Additional TESS information is documented in Chapter 5 TESS Operations Auto Term Note Refer to Group on page 160 for additional instructions When this parameter is set to Y a unique terminal number is assigned for the current TESS session If Auto Term is set to Y any value assigned to the Terminal parameter is ignored AN Note Auto Term is available when 802 1Qv2 is assigned to the Host Conn parameter page 160 or when 802 1Qv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu 802 10 v1 on page D 6 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 159 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Host Conn Group Auto Term Range Group 1 1 5 When Auto Term is set to Y
305. sition in the field the terminal emits a keyboard error beep If the lt CLR gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message In both left and right justified fields the lt CLR gt key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field If the lt CLR gt key is pressed while cursor is in the right most Insert mode position in the field the terminal emits a keyboard error beep If the lt CLR gt key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre filled by the host application the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table The lt CLR gt key operates in the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode Feursor mode 96 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 5 TESS Operations lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS 5 5 3 lt DEL gt Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode In a left justified field the lt DEL gt key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left When the last character in the field is deleted the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified and the field is open
306. ssor ifmounted in a way that prevents water from pooling in the upper case The Pre Reg should be mounted vertically with the mounting flange face down The power module inside the unit is sealed If mounted properly the water drains out of the unit and does not harm the power supply inside the unit The diagram below illustrates recommended connection options Recommended Connections Truck Batte 13985 Cable Filter Only Terminal ry 19893 500 Dirty power O Fier 82xx Std Low Temp Freezer 10 100VDC In out 1035 Powered Cradle Power Suppl Model 8742 Truck Battery 13985 Cable Active Transient Filter Terminal Vacs Dirty cower gt gt gt 15 55VDC IN Nom 82xx Std Temp Low Temp ry Dirty p Filters 168VDC 7035 Powered Cradles 20msTrans 18V 36 W out Figure 8 5 Recommended Connections AN Note Teklogix provides another Transient Suppressor PN 19893 500 that filters transients but does not provide a power supply Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 221 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Accessories List 8 11 Accessories List Carrying Devices Accessory oid 7035 Handstrap Kit 20610 002 7035 Wrist Strap 30020 6 Ft Shoulder Strap 30585 7035 Hard Plastic Holster 30584 001 7035 Soft Shell Holster 31711 7035 Belt loop leather For use with protective case 20636 Web Belt nylon 1 5 X 48 plastic buckle 18108 004 7035
307. state when the lt BLUE gt lt ENTER gt key combination is pressed to turn the terminal off In this state the 7035 appears to be off While the system context and memory are saved the communication link is down and the terminal display is blank To return to APM Enable state the lt ENTER ON gt key must be pressed Returning to full power state takes approximately 4 seconds The terminal enters the Off state from APM Suspend state after a configurable timeout The terminal is completely powered off with no CPU context or memory contents saved Only the real time clock is maintained To return to the APM Enabled state the lt ENTER ON gt key must be pressed The system runs through a complete reset reboot sequence 240 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 9 Specifications Lithium lon Battery Pack 7035 Only 9 12 Lithium lon Battery Pack 7035 Only Battery Pack Technology Supported pack Charge temperature Discharge temperature Life span Charge Cycles Charge Time Performance Monitor Voltage Capacity Weight Battery Life Supported Chargers Memory Battery Gauge Graceful Power Fail Lithium Ion Li Ion PN 20605 003 10 Cto 45 C 50 F to 113 F 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Pack performance does not degrade below 80 of nominal under typical daily use over a 2 year period Based on one charge discharge cycle every day and 250 working days per year Minimum
308. stations in the system The default setting of 17 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio operating at 9600 baud Window Delay Important The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol This parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds the terminal should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive transmit switching characteristics of the radio The value assigned must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio operating at 9600 baud Poll Timeout This parameter in units of 16 6 ms sets the time out value used for automatic channel switching Poll Timeout is the time during which the terminal should hear at least one poll from a base station As each Poll Timeout passes without a successful poll from the base station the terminal channel quality decreases If the channel quality falls to below 46 the terminal begins searching for a new channel Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual D 17 Appendix D Radio Parameters Power Saving Late Tx Limit The value entered for this parameter measured in milliseconds sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which a terminal can make a tr
309. t e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt F1 gt To access function key lt F12 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by lt F2 gt and so on Accessing SHIFT Function Keys lt F21 gt To lt F30 gt Accessing lt F21 gt to lt F30 gt requires pressing the lt SHIFT gt key and then a function key from lt F1 gt to lt F10 gt For example to access function key lt F21 gt e Press the lt SHIFT gt key followed by lt FI gt To access function key lt F22 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt and so on to lt F10 gt 3 5 3 Accessing The Macro Keys 36 key 7035 terminals are equipped with 6 macro keys The first two lt M1 gt and lt M2 gt are directly accessible from the keyboard lt M3 gt to lt M6 gt require key combinations Accessing Macro Keys lt MI gt And lt M2 gt Macro keys lt M1 gt and lt M2 gt can be accessed directly that is a key combination is not required e To access lt M1 gt press the key labelled lt M1 gt in the bottom row of the terminal e To access lt M2 gt press the key labelled lt M2 gt Accessing Macro Keys lt M3 gt And lt M4 gt To access lt M3 gt e Press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by macro key lt M1 gt located in the bottom row of the keyboard To access lt M4 gt e Press lt ORANGE gt lt M2 gt 64 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing T
310. t A gt e To access lt F20 gt press lt CTRL gt lt ORANGE gt lt Z gt and so on Accessing SHIFT Function Keys lt F25 gt To lt F30 gt To access these function keys you ll need to press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example to access lt F25 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F1 gt To access lt F26 gt e Press lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing SHIFT ORANGE Function Keys lt F31 gt To lt F36 gt Accessing these keys requires that you press the lt SHIFT gt key in combination with the lt ORANGE gt key and the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F31 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt and then press lt A gt e To access lt F32 gt press lt SHIFT gt lt ORANGE gt lt Z gt and so on Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 79 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing AZERTY Macro Keys 3 8 3 Accessing AZERTY Macro Keys A N Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 8255 and 8260 keyboards offer 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt Depending on whether you are using an Fl to F6 or FI To F10 keyboard accessing these keys differs slightly 3 8 3 1 Fl To F10 Keyboard Macro Key Access Fl To F10 keyboards offer 12 macro keys lt M1 gt to lt M12 gt They are displayed in b
311. t CTRL gt and lt SHIFT gt function keys and the arrow keys AN Important A step by step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 181 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 55 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions 44 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 3 44 Key 7035 Keyboards 3 3 1 Accessing Alpha Characters On 44 key 7035s all alpha characters are printed on the terminal plastic in orange letters above and to the left of the keyboard keys The orange print indicates that you must first press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the key above which the alpha character you want to access is printed As an example e To access the letter c press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press the 7 key e To access the letter t press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press function key lt F10 gt Creating Uppercase Letters To display an uppercase letter e Press the lt ORANGE gt key and then the lt SHIFT gt key before typing an alpha character Important Remember to unlock the lt ORANGE gt key when it is no longer required You need to press this key a second time to unlock or turn it off Refer to Key Lock Function on page 52 for a com plete description of this function You can change the default key lock function of the lt ORANGE gt key using the One Shot Mode parameter see One Shot Mode on page 121 3 3 2 Accessing Function
312. t CTRL gt s Displays the terminal status continuously Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your terminals screen Lock B Lock H fld enh application name lt CTRL gt w Displays the terminal status when the terminal is in Lock B or Lock H mode The status line would be similar to the sample above lt CTRL gt t Displays the terminal status with the terminal number instead of the name Lock B Lock H rep terminal nn lt CTRL gt A Displays a menu of available hosts Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual 99 ANSI OPERATIONS 6 1 Configuration he eee bee eee eee 103 6 2 Sending Data To The Hoste o s se as aanre a a o o e 103 6 3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 104 6 4 Working With Sessions o o e o 105 6 4 1 Establishing A New Session o o e e 105 6 4 2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions 105 6 4 3 Closing A SESSION 22 eee ev eee ee eee ees 106 6 4 4 Printing A Screen 2 o ee 106 6 4 5 Smart Echo Disabling o ooo o 106 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 101 Chapter 6 ANSI Operations Configuration The Teklogix terminal in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes 6 1 Configuration To configure the t
313. t extent possi ble by applicable law i ii iii 1v Vi copying and or transfer of the software is prohibited and reverse assembly reverse compilation or other translation of the software is prohibited and software is copyrighted and licensed not sold and that title to the software is not transferred and the owner of the software DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and liability is limited to the amount paid by the end user for the software and the use of the software is allowed only in conjunction with products described herein i Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc FlashFX is a trademark of Datalight Inc Copyright 1993 1999 Datalight Inc All Rights Reserved Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual xi xii Cisco End User License Agreement EXHIBIT C Minimum Terms And Conditions 1 Each end user license agreement shall contain terms that are legally sufficient to i Authorize the end user to make one copy of the Driver Software for backup purposes only ii Prohibit further copying and or transfer of the software included in the Cisco Adapter or Driver Software 111 Prohibit reverse assembly reverse compilation or other translation of the software included in the Cisco Adapter or Driver Software or any portion ther
314. t portion of the keyboard For example e To access function key lt F1 gt press lt F1 gt e To access function key lt F2 gt press lt F2 gt and so on 74 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions F1 To F6 Keyboard Function Key Access Accessing ORANGE Function Keys lt F7 gt To lt FI2 gt These function keys are presented in orange print just above and to the left of the first six alpha keys on the keyboard A B C D E and F Accessing these function keys requires that you press the lt ORANGE gt key followed by the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F7 gt press the lt ORANGE gt key and then press lt A gt e To access lt F8 gt press lt ORANGE gt lt B gt and so on Accessing CTRL Function Keys lt FI3 gt To lt FI8 gt To access function keys lt F13 gt to lt F18 gt you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key in combination with one of lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt For example e To access lt F13 gt press the lt CTRL gt key and then press lt F1 gt e To access lt F14 gt press lt CTRL gt lt F2 gt and so on Accessing CTRL ORANGE Function Keys lt FI9 gt To lt F24 gt To access lt F19 gt to lt F24 gt you ll need to press the lt CTRL gt key followed by the lt ORANGE gt key and then the appropriate alpha key For example e To access lt F19 gt press lt CTRL gt
315. talling 7035 15 AP Controller 802 1Qv2 displaying 90 AP Density TRX7431 D 2 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual AP mac access point address displaying 87 App parameter 1 62 Append Enter 1769 Append FO 69 appending to bar codes characters 134 137 139 Applications ANSI Settings 147 157 Async In ANSI 158 character attributes TESS 163 Character Sets ANSI 54 Character Sets TESS 164 Features parameters TESS 172 Fields parameters TESS 170 Host Conn ANSI 148 Host Conn TESS 60 Keyboard parameters ANSI 156 menu Applications 146 Name and Type 46 Scanner parameters TESS 169 Screen parameters ANSI 751 Screen parameters TESS 161 Serial parameters TESS 166 Start and End ANSD 59 TESS Settings 159 168 Test parameters TESS 168 Transmit parameters ANSD 155 approvals 7035 including scanner 230 8255 232 8260 232 arrow keys completing a data field 95 170 cycling through special characters 116 182 in macros 183 moving the cursor 49 ASCII Full Ascii 735 matching fields 765 table C Async In 758 attributes video 153 154 171 Auth Trap 1790 Index Boldface indicates a parameter name as it appears on the terminal Auth Type D 0 Auto Answer 156 Auto Login ANSI Telnet Settings 50 Auto Pan 24 Auto Radio Addr D 6 D 13 AutoRep Fn 768 AutoRep T O 169 auto tab fields 94 Auto Term ANSI 147 Auto Term TESS 159 Auto Wrap 152 AZERTY keyboard 8255 amp 8260 77
316. tements as identified in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this IEEE 802 11 WaveLAN Kit or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by Lucent T
317. ter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 137 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Code 128 7 6 3 2 Code 128 Code 128 Type Standard Include Sym N Size Chars Type When using Code 128 you can choose the type of bar code variation the scanner will recognize The options available are Standard UCC and EAN UCC These options are described below Standard Set Standard to Y if Code 128 is desired UCC UCC is a variation of Code 128 EAN UCC Set EAN UCC to Y to enable this type of bar code EAN UCC bar codes include group separators and start codes Include Sym Enabling setting to Y Include Sym causes the group separator s and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the terminal screen Size Chars See Size Chars on page 136 1 6 3 3 EAN 13 EAN 13 Inc Country Y Include Chk Y Size Chars Addendum Disabled Inc Country If this parameter is enabled set to Y the country code is included with the decoded bar code data 138 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters EAN 13 Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data
318. term is launched the first configured session will appear in the screen area To cycle through each session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running e Press lt ALT gt lt F6 gt Each time this key combination is pressed the next session window becomes active To display a specific configured application e Press the lt ALT gt key followed by the application number For example press lt ALT gt 1 to display application number 1 lt ALT gt 2 to display application number 2 and so on 5 3 The Field Types Fixed Field displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard Entry Field allows the operator to enter data This type of field is usually shown 13 AS enn Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 93 Chapter 5 TESS Operations IBM 5250 Emulation Keys Match Field the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry If the entered data does not match the expected format the terminal emits a long beep Auto tab Field automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled Bar code only Field is filled with data from a bar code reader Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field Serial I O Field is filled with data coming from a serial port Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field 5 4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys The following keys allow the Teklogix terminal to better emulate the functions of a true I
319. ters 1 3 4 Y N Parameters Y N parameters can only be enabled Y or disabled N To enable or disable a Y N parameter e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key once or e Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter Some Y N parameters have sub menus For these parameters a double right arrow gt gt appears next to the Y or N 1 3 5 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words To cycle through the set e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow keys 1 3 6 String Entry Parameters Important For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys refer to Global Macros on page 181 A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter When a string entry parameter contains data it is displayed in reverse video Empty fields are not displayed in reverse video The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section In string entry parameters the lt UP gt arrow lt DOWN gt arrow lt ENTER gt and lt DEL gt keys have the following functions e The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow e lt ENTER gt completes the entry field e lt DEL gt deletes the character t
320. ters B Emulations e DOS Prompt To display the Parameters menu e Type the letter a e Type your password in the Password window and press lt ENTER gt Parameters Sys LCL Scanner Applications View Manager GPS Ports Global Macros gt Network SNMP Radio Sound ANSI FK Remap Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 181 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Displaying The Global Macros Table 1 11 2 Displaying The Global Macros Table To display the Global Macros table e In the Parameters menu position the cursor on the Global Macros option and press lt F1 gt to display the macro table AN Note This is a sample 44 key 7035 macro table Vehicle mount terminals dis plays 12 macro fields rather than 4 r Global Macros e Position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key to which you want to assign macros 1 corresponds to macro key lt M1 gt 2 corresponds to macro key lt M2 gt and so on Once the cursor is in a macro field you have a number of options when creating a macro You can type text and numbers choose from a set of ASCII characters and program the function of special keys into a macro In macros the lt UP gt arrow lt DOWN gt arrow lt ENTER gt and lt DEL gt keys have the following functions e The lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrow keys mov
321. that will display well on your Teklogix terminal A amp L Note All built in Teklogix software uses only intense white VGA index 15 and black VGA index 0 both of which display well on Teklogix terminals Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 127 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Watchdog Timer The values on the left hand side of the Palette Remap screen represent the original VGA palette these values cannot be changed The values on the right hand side of this screen can be altered to remap colours as they reach your Teklogix terminal display For example suppose that you want your terminal to always replace the colour red with the colour black You need to change the red colour value of 4 to the black colour value of 0 Palette Remap Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Brown t Grey ark Grey t Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Yellow White BE Re et ee im cot ct ct ct MhOAATWMWWODAIUNDUBWNHEO hMhOAATWMWWOANUNDAUBWNHEO To remap a colour e Highlight the colour you want to remap and press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key until the colour value you want is displayed e Press lt F4 gt to save your changes and reset the terminal See page 117 for terminal reset information 7 5 11 Watchdog Timer Setting this parameter to Enabled signals the terminal to reboot automatically when control of the terminal is not periodica
322. the lt RIGHT gt arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead If you ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right To add another ASCII character in the string entry field next to the one you ve already chosen e Type a numeric character for example type the number 7 e Next press the lt DEL gt key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character e Press the lt RIGHT gt or lt LEFT gt arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters and select another character 1 11 5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros Macros can contain the function of a subset of terminal keys The keys that can be programmed into macros include lt ENTER gt lt DEL gt and lt CLR gt lt BLUE gt lt DEL gt function keys and arrow keys To program the function of a key e With the cursor in the Global Macros table use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the macro field corresponding to the macro key you want to program the field labelled 1 represents lt M1 gt and so on e Press lt CTRL gt and then type the letter el l represents literal e Press the key you wish to add to the macro For example To execute the function of the lt ENTER gt key in a macro type lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 183
323. the Customer with respect to infringement of third party intellectual property Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual xiii Limitation Of Liability Circumstances may arise where because of a default on Fortress s part or other liability Customer is entitled to recover damages from Fortress In each such instance regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from Fortress including fundamental breach negligence misrepresentation or other contract or tort claim Fortress is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury including death and damage to real property and tangible personal property and the amount of any other actual direct damages up to either U S 25 000 or equivalent in local currency or the charges if recurring 12 months charges apply for the Product that is the subject of the claim whichever is less This limit also applies to Fortress s suppliers and Fortress Authorized Resellers It is the maximum for which Fortress its suppliers and Authorized Reseller are collectively responsible UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS FORTRESS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING 1 THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES 2 LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO YOUR RECORDS OR DATA OR 3 SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS EVEN IF FORTRESS ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY SOME JURISDICTIONS
324. the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate that a key is locked on For example when the lt CTRL gt key is locked on the onscreen message CTRL is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area For more information about status area indicators refer to Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only on page 29 3 2 4 2 8255 8260 Key Lock Function Keep in mind that vehicle mount terminals are available in two keyboard types Fl to F6 and Fl to F10 see 8255 And 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Keyboards on page 47 for a brief description Depending on which keyboard type you are using locking and unlocking the lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt or lt SHIFT gt key differs slightly These differences are highlighted in this section AN Important Make certain that the appropriate keyboard type F1 to F6 or Fl to F10 is selected in the Keyboard Type parameter see Keyboard Type Vehicle Mounts Only on page 130 On 8255 and 8260 vehicle mount terminals LEDs are used to indicate the status of a key When a key is locked on the corresponding LED stays on until the key is unlocked If you ve only pressed a key once the corresponding LED blinks until the key is no longer active Locking And Unlocking The lt ORANGE gt Key To lock this key on e Press the lt ORANGE gt key once To unlock or turn off this key e Press the locked lt ORANGE gt key a se
325. ther letter from the same key will be chosen To type the letter b e Press the lt 1 gt key twice to choose the letter b e Press lt gt to accept the letter b To type the letter c e Press the lt 1 gt key three times to choose the letter c When you have completed your alpha selections from this key you can do one of the following e Ifyou want to choose additional alpha characters from another key s leave the lt ORANGE gt key on and press the next numeric key that supports the alpha character you require e If you do not want to choose any additional alpha characters press the lt ORANGE gt key to end alpha selection 62 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions Accessing Function Keys Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters From A Range Of Keys If you plan on choosing alpha characters from a number of different keys you are not required to press the Accept lt gt key after each alpha selection The lt gt key is only required when you are choosing more than one alpha character from the same key e g a b and c from the lt 1 gt key Pressing the next key in a sequence of keys or pressing the lt ORANGE gt key to end alpha selection accepts the alpha characters in the same way as pressing the Accept lt gt gt key This is how it works Suppose you want to type the letters a
326. these keys e Press the locked key a third time When the key is unlocked the corresponding LED will turn off AN Important Keep in mind that the lt ORANGE gt key is still locked on even after you ve unlocked the lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt or lt SHIFT gt key If the lt ORANGE gt key is no longer required press it a second time to turn it off Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 53 Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions The Function Keys The FI To F6 Keyboard This keyboard type is equipped with a dedicated lt CTRL gt lt ALT gt and lt SHIFT gt key that is a key combination is not required to access these keys To lock the function of the any of these keys on e Press the appropriate key twice For example to lock the function of the lt CTRL gt key on e Press lt CTRL gt lt CTRL gt You ll know the key is locked on when the corresponding LED stays on To unlock or turn off any of these keys e Press the locked key a third time When the key is unlocked the corresponding LED will turn off 3 2 5 The Function Keys AN Note Accessing function keys varies slightly depending on the type of terminal and keyboard you are using Refer to the appropriate section s for details 7035 Hand Held Keyboards e 44 key Page 57 e 56 key Page 59 e 36 key Page 63 8255 amp 8260 Vehicle Mount Keyboards e QWERTY Page 67 e AZERTY Page
327. tion base that defines the common features of TCP IP networks Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 189 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Group Name The name assigned here allows MapRF users to group devices by a common name This name is defined in the TEKLOGIX GENERIC MIB refer to the introductory paragraph under the heading SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol on page 189 for details about MIBs The Group Name is also displayed on the terminal statistics screen Contact This field identifies the contact person for this managed node along with information about how to get in touch with this person Name The value assigned here is the name assigned by the network administrator for this managed node Normally this is the node s domain name Location This parameter is used to identify the physical location of this node e g Warehouse A Pillar 32B SNMP Enable When SNMP Enable is set to Y the default value SNMP functions are enabled If SNMP is not used set this parameter to N to disable this feature Auth Trap A trap is a report sent to SNMP managers when authorization failures occur The value assigned to this parameter is defined in MIB II Setting the Auth Trap parameter to Y allows authorization traps to be sent when a failure is detected e g an SNMP message received with a bad community name Communiti
328. trictly followed BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix offices Psion Teklogix Inc Psion Teklogix Corp 2100 Meadowvale Blvd 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd Mississauga Ontario Suite 500 Canada Erlanger Kentucky LSN 7J9 USA 41018 Psion Teklogix S A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid generating heat or exploding adhere to precautions listed below e Do not use the battery if the battery case is cracked or has signs of other physical damage e The battery incorporates built in safety devices To ensure their proper function do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery e Do not short circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces hair pins etc e Do not dispose of batteries in fire e Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater e Do not immerse the battery in water e When charging use the battery charger specifically designed for the battery e Do not pierce strike throw or step on the battery e Do not directly solder the battery e Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet vehicle cigarette lighter etc
329. um can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 133 must be set to Y An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This parameter provides three options Disabled Options and Required Depending on the value chosen for this parameter an addendum is recognized or ignored When Addendum is set to Disabled the scanner does not recognize an addendum If this parameter is set to Optional the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists appends it to the main bar code When the parameter is set to Required the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum 1 634 EAN 8 Include Chk Y Size Chars Addendum Disable Include Chk If this parameter is enabled set to Y the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Size Chars See Size Chars beginning on page 139 Addendum AN Important Before Addendum can take effect the Short Code parameter in the Options menu see page 133 must be set to Y Refer to Addendum on page 140 140 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters UPCA 7 6 3 5 UPCA UPC A Inc Num Sys N Include Chk N Size Chars Addendum Disabled Inc Num Sys If this parameter is enabled set to Y the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data In
330. umber of transmit failures transmission late for response window total number of received messages total number of received radio link aborts total number of received polls total number of poll timeouts 86 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 4 Tekterm 802 1Qv1 Radio Statistics Screen 444 802 1QvI Radio Statistics Screen 802 IQv1 Statistics AP mac 00 C0 AF 00 43 C0 bootnum C33B vl CQ 100 rm 12 xm 7 rb 50 XL 1 ra 7 xa 12 bt O xr all rE 138 va 30 Address Info Radio Address 1024 Tnum 33 TESS Tnum 16 ANSI Tnum 1024 SNMP MAC ADDR 00 60 1D 04 BD 9D Serial NO 341220 SysName lt the system name gt GroupName lt the group name gt The statistics represented in the sample screen above are defined as follows AP mac bootnum vl CQ rm xm rb MAC address of the Teklogix access point base station with which this terminal is currently associated e g C33B the boot number of the network controller This number increments each time the controller reboots so that terminals can detect the reboot when they reinitialize the version of the 802 IQ v1 protocol communication quality represented as a percentage value with 100 indicating the best possible communication quality number of unique received messages number of unique transmitted messages number of received beacons This number should continu ously increment
331. uration on each axis Random Vibration 1 5 g RMS 4 Hz to 500 Hz 60 min duration on each axis Rain Dust IEC 529 IP66 rating 230 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 9 Specifications 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications 8260 EL Electroluminescent Standard Temp Environmental AN Note For EL freezer and low temp terminals operating temperatures and instructions review page 38 and 39 Operating temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Shock Random Vibration Rain Dust 10 to 60 C 14 to 140 E 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 E 10 to 95 RH non condensing 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse 11 ms duration on each axis 1 5 g RMS 4 Hz to 500 Hz 60 min duration on each axis TEC 529 IP66 rating 8255 LCD And 8260 LCD Standard Temp Environmental AN Note For 8260 LCD freezer and low temp terminals operating temperatures and instructions refer to 8255 8260 Freezer Terminals on page 38 and 8255 8260 Low Temp Terminals on page 39 Note that 8255 LCD terminals are not available in a low temperature or freezer versions Operating temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Shock Random Vibration Rain Dust Memory Expansion Proprietary plug in card 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F 10 to 95 RH non condensing 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse 11 ms duration on each axis 1 5 g RMS 4 Hz to 500 H
332. urce capable of carrying the additional 3 Amps required by standard terminals or 5 Amps for freezer terminals A amp L Note For vehicles operating on 24 Volts or above connections must be made as close to the vehicle battery as possible If an unfused power source must be used install the fuse assembly PN 19440 provided with PN 13985 To connect the fuse assembly push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive red lead of the power cable Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery e Warning Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the AN Note 10 55 volt range When installing terminals on vehicles operating on 24 Volts and above the diode assembly supplied with the extension power cable 13985 must be used to reduce the AC ripple produced by the SCR traction motor controller on the vehicle To connect the diode push the male connector on the diode assembly into the female connector on the positive red lead of the power cable If the fuse assembly is already installed connect the diode assembly to the fuse assembly as described in the previous sentence Connect the red wire from the diode assembly to a fused power source on the vehicle It is recommended that all connections be secured with electrical tape or heat shrink to prevent contaminants from degrading the connection Teklogix 703
333. ustments are saved Volume The Volume parameter is used to adjust the beeper volume of the terminal beeper The higher the value entered the louder the beeper volume of the terminal The allowable range is O to 15 When a volume adjustment is made using this parameter it is saved to memory 120 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Key Click Contrast gn Note The Contrast parameter is not available for 8255 terminals equipped with vacuum fluorescent displays This parameter is used to adjust the terminal screen contrast The allowable range is 5 to 5 The higher the value assigned the darker the screen contrast 7 5 2 Key Click Key click Rang Tone 2675 200 5000 Duration 75 25 150 The parameters in the Key Click sub menu are used to adjust the sound emitted from the terminal when a key is pressed When Key Click is set to Y an audible sound is emitted from the terminal with each key pressed Setting this parameter to N disables the key click sound Tone The value entered in the Tone parameter determines the frequency of the key clicks and is measured in Hz The allowable range is 200 to 5000 The higher the value the higher the pitch Duration The value entered in the Duration parameter measures the length of time a sound is emitted when a key is pressed and is measured in milliseconds The allowable ra
334. wdriver is required Teklogix recommends that the hand strap provided with your terminal always be used However if your terminal has an internal scanner and you plan to use the pistol grip accessory a hand strap is not required Each end of the hand strap has two holes drilled in it The holes nearest the outer edges of the hand strap allow the hand strap to be installed more loosely while the holes closer to the centre of the strap provide a tighter fit The hand strap can be secured either on the left or the right side of the terminal depending on operator preference Two black 4 40 Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap for attachment Four threaded inserts are available on the back of the terminal The hand strap can be attached either to the upper and lower most inserts on the left side of the terminal or to the upper and lower most inserts on the right side of the terminal To attach the hand strap choose on which side of the terminal the hand strap is to be attached and securely fasten the screws into the back of the terminal 2 2 3 2 Attaching The Pistol Grip gn Note A Phillips head screwdriver is required The four threaded inserts in the upper part of the terminal casing are used to attach the pistol grip Four black 4 40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory AN Note Prior to installation make sure the trigger mechanism has been securely snapped into the pistol grip body and the trigger op
335. window should be cleaned with a mild detergent and water as required Never apply cleaners directly on the terminal use a cloth dampened with a mild detergent Warning To avoid scratching the display and scan windows do not use abrasive cleansers 2 13 3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery Important Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 201 outlines additional safety precautions For detailed battery specifications refer to Lithium Ion Battery Pack 7035 Only on page 241 7035 terminals use Lithium Ion batteries that do not require conditioning Each battery pack tracks its own capacity A horizontal bar graph referred to as a battery gauge is displayed in the status area of the terminal screen It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100 resolution 10 of nominal The operator is notified when the battery capacity is low 42 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation Maintaining The 7035 Battery BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix offices Teklogix Inc Teklogix Corp 2100 Meadowvale Blvd 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd Mississauga Ontario Suite 500 LSN 7J9 Erlanger Kentucky Canada USA 41018 Teklogix S A Parc Club Du Golf Bat 1 13856 Aix En Provence Cedex 3 France DO NOT DISPOSE OF I
336. working with application session windows 84 Tekterm Exit Password 195 Tekterm bypassing to Display Menu 26 Tekterm launching and exiting 27 Telnet connection 148 160 Telnet connection ANSI 148 terminal off line terminal D 22 Terminal ANSI 1 48 Terminal TESS 160 terminal maintenance battery 7035 42 cleaning 42 7035 special instructions 42 terminal serial number 802 1Qv1 See Serial NO 88 802 10v2 See Serial NO 88 TESS Append Enter 69 Append F0 69 Applications menu 146 AutoRep Fn 768 AutoRep T O 169 Auto Term 159 Blink video attrib 172 Bold video attrib 177 CLR key behaviour 96 Columns 767 configuration 93 Conn Type connection type 160 ContNxtField 769 CTRL commands 95 cursor movement in edit modes 95 Custom Chars ASCH characters 174 DEL key behaviour 97 edit modes 95 Enter On Arr 170 Enter To FO 170 171 Entry Mode 771 error reply message 165 Exclusive 766 Faint video attrib 171 Fcursor mode 95 Features parameters 172 Field mode 95 Field Order 770 Field parameters 170 Host Connection Type 6 In Serial In 766 Insert mode 95 Invis characters 164 Kbd Locked 772 keyboard lock 172 matching fields via data stream 165 modes edit 95 multiple sessions 146 Normal video attrib 171 NULL characters 164 number of columns in screen 6 number of rows in screen 1 62 Out Serial Out 168 Pages Saved 162 pass through 177 Port 6 query comma
337. xternal Standard SMA 8 8 The 7035 Picker Cradle Picker cradles provide physical support for terminals allowing hands free operation Teklogix offers three types of picker cradles e Model number 7937A an unpowered picker cradle e Model number 7937B a powered picker cradle with 11 16VDC input e Model number 7937C a powered picker cradle with 10 55 VDC input 212 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories Mounting Hardware 8 8 1 Mounting Hardware The 7035 Picker Cradle can be mounted on its own or with one of the following e Heavy duty pedestal mount PN 30082 e Pedestal mount with locking joint PN 18447 001 e Mounting plate kit PN 18448 001 e Scanner mounting plate PN 18449 001 e Scanner holder PN 92892 8 8 2 Installation AN Note Where applicable the unit should be mounted inside the roll cage Installation requirements vary depending on the type of application used mobile e g a fork lift truck or fixed e g a work table For a typical installation 1 Choose a suitable mounting location 2 Ifnecessary connect the pass through cable to an accessory 3 Connect the power source 8 8 3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting AN Note Ifthe cradle is attached from behind to a plate or pedestal mount using the four threaded holes 8 32 in the rear bracket it does not need to be disassembled Ensure that the screws used are the c
338. y available in the Console 2 Parameters menu Serial 1 and Console 2 sub menus change depending on the device you choose Ports Serial 1 Disable Parameters Console 2 Scan See Parameters n Enable Range Speed 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Data Bits 8 7 8 Parity None None Odd Even Stop Bits 1 1 2 Flow Ctrl None None XON XOFF Buffer 512 32 2048 Retries 3 1 100 Retry Tmo 50 0 100 Input Tmo 2 0 100 Scan See see page 180 Test N Y N Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 177 Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings Speed This parameter determines the bit rate of the port Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port The options are Odd Even and None Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 or 2 used for asynchronous communication Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your terminal The 7035 can perform XON XOFF and or CTS RTS handshaking Keep in mind that CTS RTS hardware flow control generally results in faster data throughput AN Note Flow Control under Serial I contains the following options None CTS RTS XON XOFF and Both Options available under Console 2
339. y operation is not consistent with the DELETE key on a PC keyboard It is consistent with the PC BACKSPACE key The lt CLR gt function erases the contents of the field in which the cursor resides The lt CTRL gt Key The lt CTRL gt key modifies the next key pressed and is application dependent For example in a macro field pressing lt CTRL gt lt L gt L is the literal function followed by the lt ENTER gt key inserts the function of the lt ENTER gt key into the macro In TESS and ANSI applications defined lt CTRL gt key combinations perform specific actions lt CTRL gt key functions for each application are described in the appropriate chapters of this manual A amp L Note On vehicle mounts without a dedicated lt CTRL gt key the lt ORANGE gt key is used to access this function 50 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3 Keyboards Operating Instructions The Standard Keys lt ALT gt Key This key provides access to alternate commands as defined by the application you are using AN Note On vehicle mount terminals without a dedicated lt ALT gt key the lt ORANGE gt key is used to access this function The lt ESC gt Key While in the Parameters menu pressing the lt ESC gt key closes the current menu and displays the previous one In an ANSI session pressing this key sends an escape character to the host In a TESS session the lt ESC gt key has no effect A am
340. y identifies all transmissions to and from the terminal Other applications running in the terminal such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different terminal number In addition each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number 7 1 1 1 Host Conn AN Important This option is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio Host Conn Range Conn Type Telnet 802 IQv2 9010t Telnet Settings see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your terminal For ANSI applications this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections 802 10v2 9010t TCP Direct or Telnet Keep in mind that choosing Telnet allows the terminal to communicate directly with the host 148 Teklogix 7035 8255 8 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Host Conn Settings An Note The Settings sub menu is not available when 802 1Qv2 is selected as the Conn Type In addition this sub menu varies depending on which option you ve selected Telnet or 9010t Telnet Settings Range gt Host see text Port 23 0 32767 ENTER Pmpt Press ENTER to connect see text ESC Prompt Press ESC to cancel see text Aut
341. y the X Increment and Y Increment parameters are used for manual panning The remaining parameters in the Panning menu are used to specify auto panning margins X Increment determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the lt BLUE gt key is pressed followed by the lt LEFT gt or lt RIGHT gt arrow key Y Increment determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the lt BLUE gt key is pressed followed by the lt UP gt or lt DOWN gt arrow key e Type a value in the X Increment and Y Increment parameters To pan the screen contents e Press the lt BLUE gt key followed by the lt RIGHT gt lt LEFT gt lt UP gt or lt DOWN gt arrow key to pan the entire screen of information Pressing lt BLUE gt lt LEFT gt arrow pans the screen to the right pressing lt BLUE gt lt RIGHT gt arrow pans the screen to the left and so on AN Note To more efficiently pan the content of the screen try locking the lt BLUE gt key on by pressing it twice You can then press any arrow key in any direction until the necessary information has been brought into view When you have finished panning the information press the lt BLUE gt key a third time to unlock or turn it off The lt DEL CLR gt Key The lt DEL gt key sometimes referred to as destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke This ke
342. yed in lowercase characters 1 5 4 Typematic Rpt r Typematic rpt Range Delay 500 ms see text Rate 5 Cps 1 cps 10 cps Test see text When this parameter is enabled set to Y pressing and holding down an alphanumeric key will cause that character to repeat until the key is released Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters The allowable values are 150 ms 200 ms 250 ms 300 ms 350 ms 400 ms 450 msand 500 ms 122 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Caps Lock On Rate The value assigned for the Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second cps The allowable values range from 1 cps to10 cps Test This parameter is provided so that you can test the character repeat rate of your terminal Once you ve enabled set to Y the Typematic rpt parameter and assigned a Delay and Rate value position your cursor in this field Press and hold down an alphanumeric key to test the rate of character repeats 7 5 5 Caps Lock On This parameter operates like the lt CAPS LOCK gt key on your PC keyboard When Caps Lock On is set to Y all alpha characters are displayed in uppercase When this parameter is set to N alpha characters are displayed in lowercase 1 5 6 Panning AN Impo
343. ying The Global Macros Table 182 7 11 3 Choosing An ASCII Character 182 7 11 4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters 183 7 11 5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros 183 1 12 NOGWOIK o i sine eo art e we ee wl eh le wee we 184 7 13 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 189 7 14 Radio socorrer ae be eRe Gee amp Bard weed aoe WORE oo 192 TEND SOUNG gece A ead ela oe ages a ate nga 192 7 15 1 Vehicle Mount Sound Parameter Values 192 7 15 2 7035 Hand Held Sound Parameter Values 193 TAG Sec rity srece aaa a a SS Bi 194 7 16 1 Sup Password o lt 194 116 2 Allow Teklogix 2 44644 08648 8464 d5 4 Bees 194 7 16 3 Tekterm Exit Password o o 195 TAT ANSTFK Remap s e soa 4 8 bot eed Be wh a 195 Chapter 8 Terminal Accessories 8 1 External Bar Code Readers o o o 199 8 1 1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader 199 8 2 The 1039 BaterY 200 02 a a Bs 200 8 2 1 Lithium Ion Battery Safety Precautions 201 8 2 2 Lithium Ion Battery Pack Specifications 202 8 3 The 7942 In Unit Charger o o e 203 8 3 1 Mounting Bracket o 203 8 3 2 Connecting The Power Source 0 0 204 8 3 3 In Unit Charger LED Indicators 204 8 3 4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger 204 8 3 5 Charg
344. ypassing Tekterm At Terminal Bootup 26 2 6 1 2 Launching And Exiting The Parameters Menu 26 2 6 1 3 Launching And Exiting Tekterm 27 2 6 1 4 Launching And Exiting DOS 27 2 1 The Keyboard e ee gd he bd ae pe bara Ea a Se a a EG 27 Teklogix 7035 8255 8260 Terminals User Manual 13 Chapter 2 Assembly And Basic Operation 2 8 Terminal Indicators seese ag eh e ara ee he we a Ew Aa 28 2 8 1 EEDS is teenis b Bek G Ae ee a a Ble eye 4 Be 28 2 8 2 The Status Area 7035 Only o o 28 2 8 3 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only 29 2 84 SOT KEYS a ea eia o lek da wk ee aw 31 2 8 5 The Battery Gauge 7035 Only o o o oo o 31 2 8 6 The Beeper si ese swe ee db ee te bee wed bee we owe 31 2 8 6 1 Beeper Volume lt BLUE gt lt F3 gt And lt F4 gt 32 2 8 6 2 Beeper Volume The Volume Parameter 33 29 The Display 224 2522 msn REG a EE RE RSE wo 33 2 9 1 Adjusting The Display Contrast o 33 2 9 1 1 Contrast Adjustment lt BLUE gt lt F1 gt And lt F2 gt 34 2 9 1 2 Contrast Adjustment Using The Contrast Parameter 34 2 9 2 Panning The Display Contents o o 35 2 10 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only 35 2 10 1 Waring ae s 6546 a a ee we ew we ee 35 2 10 2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner 35
345. ys On see text Keyboard 10 secs see text Screen Important 8255 terminals with vacuum fluorescent displays do not require a Screen backlighting option They offer only the Keyboard backlighting option The value assigned for the Screen parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed a scan is completed or data is received This parameter is measured in minutes The allowable values are Disabled 10 secs 15 secs 20 secs 30 secs 45 secs 1 min 5 mins 10 mins 15 mins 20 mins 30 mins 45 mins 1 hour 2 hours and Always On Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly whether or not a key is pressed or data is received Keyboard This parameter determines how long the keyboard backlight stays on after a key is pressed The Keyboard parameter is measured in seconds and minutes The allowable values are Disabled 5 secs 10 secs 20 secs 30 secs 1 min 2 mins 4 mins and Always On Choosing Disabled turns off the keyboard backlight while Always On sets the backlight to stay on at all times 126 Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7 Setting Parameters Font Size 7 5 8 Font Size AN Note This Font Size feature is used by the DOS command line or by applications that do not provide font adjustment parameters Tekterm is equipped with its own font sizing capabilities ANSI Font Sizes are described under Fo
346. z 60 min duration on each axis IEC 529 IP66 rating 8 MB RAM expandable to 16 MB 4 MB Flash ROM expandable to 8 MB Display 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes line x character Resolution Attributes 52 x 166 mm 2 0 x 6 5 Not required 5x32 10x32 2x16 3x16 5x42 10x42 256 W x 80H Normal reverse video blink and underline Teklogix 7035 8255 amp 8260 Terminals User Manual 231 Chapter 9 Specifications 8255 8260 Vehicle Mount Terminal Specifications Display 8255 Liquid Crystal Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes line x character Resolution Attributes Display 8260 Liquid Crystal Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes line x character Resolution Attributes Display 8260 Electroluminescent Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes line x character Resolution Attributes Approvals EMC 68 x 175 mm 2 7 x 6 9 Cold cathode fluorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff 12x80 14x80 25x80 6x40 8x40 10x40 640 W x 200 H Normal reverse video blink and underline 148 x 196 mm 5 8 x 7 7 Cold cathode fluorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff 16x40 19x40 24x40 25x80 640 W x 480 H Normal reverse video blink and underline 158 x 211mm 6 2 x 8 3 Not required 16 x 40 19 x 40 24 x 40 25 x 80 640 W x 480 H Normal reverse video blink and underline FCC Part 15 Class B CE mark for

7035/8255/8260 Terminals User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents